ld: Allow EXCLUDE_FILE to be used outside of the section list
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857 flags governing input file handling.
858
859 @kindex -q
860 @kindex --emit-relocs
861 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
862 @item -q
863 @itemx --emit-relocs
864 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867 in larger executables.
868
869 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871 @kindex --force-dynamic
872 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873 @item --force-dynamic
874 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875 to VxWorks targets.
876
877 @cindex partial link
878 @cindex relocatable output
879 @kindex -r
880 @kindex --relocatable
881 @item -r
882 @itemx --relocatable
883 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
885 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887 @code{OMAGIC}.
888 @c ; see @option{-N}.
889 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897 with input files in other formats at all.
898
899 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901 @kindex -R @var{file}
902 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903 @cindex symbol-only input
904 @item -R @var{filename}
905 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909 programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
911 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913 the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915 @kindex -s
916 @kindex --strip-all
917 @cindex strip all symbols
918 @item -s
919 @itemx --strip-all
920 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922 @kindex -S
923 @kindex --strip-debug
924 @cindex strip debugger symbols
925 @item -S
926 @itemx --strip-debug
927 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929 @kindex -t
930 @kindex --trace
931 @cindex input files, displaying
932 @item -t
933 @itemx --trace
934 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
935
936 @kindex -T @var{script}
937 @kindex --script=@var{script}
938 @cindex script files
939 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
940 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
942 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
943 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
944 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947 options accumulate.
948
949 @kindex -dT @var{script}
950 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951 @cindex script files
952 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963 @samp{gcc}).
964
965 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
966 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967 @cindex undefined symbol
968 @item -u @var{symbol}
969 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979 instead.
980
981 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982 @cindex symbols, require defined
983 @cindex defined symbol
984 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
992 @kindex -Ur
993 @cindex constructors
994 @item -Ur
995 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
997 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
998 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002 @samp{-r} for the others.
1003
1004 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005 @cindex orphan sections
1006 @cindex sections, orphan
1007 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013 @table @code
1014 @item place
1015 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017 @samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019 @item discard
1020 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023 @item warn
1024 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025 issue a warning.
1026
1027 @item error
1028 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029 @end table
1030
1031 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
1033 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041 in a linker script.
1042
1043 @kindex -v
1044 @kindex -V
1045 @kindex --version
1046 @cindex version
1047 @item -v
1048 @itemx --version
1049 @itemx -V
1050 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1051 lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053 @kindex -x
1054 @kindex --discard-all
1055 @cindex deleting local symbols
1056 @item -x
1057 @itemx --discard-all
1058 Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060 @kindex -X
1061 @kindex --discard-locals
1062 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1063 @item -X
1064 @itemx --discard-locals
1065 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1068
1069 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071 @cindex symbol tracing
1072 @item -y @var{symbol}
1073 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076 to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1082 @item -Y @var{path}
1083 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084 for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087 @item -z @var{keyword}
1088 The recognized keywords are:
1089 @table @samp
1090
1091 @item combreloc
1092 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093 lookup caching possible.
1094
1095 @item common
1096 Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1097 link.
1098
1099 @item defs
1100 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1101 shared libraries are still allowed.
1102
1103 @item execstack
1104 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1105
1106 @item global
1107 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1108 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1109 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1110
1111 @item initfirst
1112 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1113 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1114 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1115 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1116 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1117 objects.
1118
1119 @item interpose
1120 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1121 but the primary executable.
1122
1123 @item lazy
1124 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1125 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1126 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1127 Lazy binding is the default.
1128
1129 @item loadfltr
1130 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1131 runtime.
1132
1133 @item muldefs
1134 Allows multiple definitions.
1135
1136 @item nocombreloc
1137 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1138
1139 @item nocommon
1140 Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1141 link.
1142
1143 @item nocopyreloc
1144 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1145 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1146
1147 @item nodefaultlib
1148 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1149 ignore any default library search paths.
1150
1151 @item nodelete
1152 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1153
1154 @item nodlopen
1155 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1156
1157 @item nodump
1158 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1159
1160 @item noexecstack
1161 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1162
1163 @item text
1164 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1165
1166 @item notext
1167 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1168
1169 @item textoff
1170 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1171
1172 @item norelro
1173 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1174
1175 @item now
1176 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1177 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1178 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1179 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1180 first called.
1181
1182 @item origin
1183 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1184
1185 @item relro
1186 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1187
1188 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1189 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1190
1191 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1192 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1193
1194 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1195 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1196 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1197 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1198
1199 @item bndplt
1200 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1201
1202 @item noextern-protected-data
1203 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1204 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1205 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1206 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1207 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1208 i386 and x86-64.
1209
1210 @item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1211 Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1212 This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1213 dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1214 Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1215
1216 @item noreloc-overflow
1217 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1218 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1219 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1220
1221 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1222 @itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1223 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1224 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1225 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1226 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1227 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1228 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1229 @option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1230 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1231 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1232 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1233 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1234
1235 @end table
1236
1237 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1238
1239 @kindex -(
1240 @cindex groups of archives
1241 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1242 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1243 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1244 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1245
1246 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1247 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1248 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1249 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1250 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1251 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1252 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1253 resolved.
1254
1255 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1256 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1257 more archives.
1258
1259 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1260 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1261 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1262 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1263 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1264 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1265 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1266 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1267 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1268 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1269 restore the old behaviour.
1270
1271 @kindex --as-needed
1272 @kindex --no-as-needed
1273 @item --as-needed
1274 @itemx --no-as-needed
1275 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1276 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1277 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1278 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1279 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1280 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1281 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1282 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1283 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1284 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1285 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1286 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1287 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1288
1289 @kindex --add-needed
1290 @kindex --no-add-needed
1291 @item --add-needed
1292 @itemx --no-add-needed
1293 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1294 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1295 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1296 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1297
1298 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1299 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1300 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1301
1302 @kindex -Bdynamic
1303 @kindex -dy
1304 @kindex -call_shared
1305 @item -Bdynamic
1306 @itemx -dy
1307 @itemx -call_shared
1308 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1309 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1310 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1311 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1312 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1313 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1314
1315 @kindex -Bgroup
1316 @item -Bgroup
1317 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1318 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1319 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1320 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1321 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1322
1323 @kindex -Bstatic
1324 @kindex -dn
1325 @kindex -non_shared
1326 @kindex -static
1327 @item -Bstatic
1328 @itemx -dn
1329 @itemx -non_shared
1330 @itemx -static
1331 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1332 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1333 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1334 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1335 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1336 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1337 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1338 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1339 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1340 libraries.
1341
1342 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1343 @item -Bsymbolic
1344 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1345 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1346 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1347 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1348 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1349 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1350 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1351 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1352
1353 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1354 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1355 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1356 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1357 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1358 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1359 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1360 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1361 libraries and position independent executables.
1362
1363 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1364 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1365 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1366 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1367 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1368 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1369 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1370 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1371 which support shared libraries.
1372
1373 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1374 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1375
1376 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1377 @item --dynamic-list-data
1378 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1379
1380 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1381 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1382 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1383 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1384
1385 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1386 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1387 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1388
1389 @kindex --check-sections
1390 @kindex --no-check-sections
1391 @item --check-sections
1392 @itemx --no-check-sections
1393 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1394 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1395 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1396 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1397 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1398 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1399 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1400 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1401 option.
1402
1403 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1404 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1405 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1406 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1407 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1408 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1409 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1410 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1411 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1412 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1413 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1414 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1415
1416 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1417 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1418 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1419 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1420 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1421 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1422 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1423 symbols.
1424
1425 @cindex cross reference table
1426 @kindex --cref
1427 @item --cref
1428 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1429 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1430 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1431
1432 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1433 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1434 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1435 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1436 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1437 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1438 symbol are listed.
1439
1440 @cindex common allocation
1441 @kindex --no-define-common
1442 @item --no-define-common
1443 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1444 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1445 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1446
1447 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1448 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1449 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1450 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1451 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1452 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1453 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1454 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1455 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1456 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1457
1458 @cindex symbols, from command line
1459 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1460 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1461 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1462 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1463 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1464 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1465 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1466 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1467 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1468 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1469 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1470 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1471
1472 @cindex demangling, from command line
1473 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1474 @kindex --no-demangle
1475 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1476 @itemx --no-demangle
1477 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1478 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1479 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1480 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1481 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1482 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1483 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1484 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1485 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1486
1487 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1488 @kindex -I@var{file}
1489 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1490 @item -I@var{file}
1491 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1492 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1493 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1494 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1495 doing.
1496
1497 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1498 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1499 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1500 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1501 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1502 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1503
1504 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1505 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1506 @item --fatal-warnings
1507 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1508 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1509 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1510
1511 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1512 @item --force-exe-suffix
1513 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1514
1515 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1516 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1517 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1518 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1519 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1520 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1521
1522 @kindex --gc-sections
1523 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1524 @cindex garbage collection
1525 @item --gc-sections
1526 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1527 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1528 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1529 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1530 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1531 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1532 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1533
1534 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1535 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1536 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1537 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1538 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1539 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1540 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1541 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1542 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1543
1544 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1545 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1546 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1547 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1548
1549 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1550 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1551 @cindex garbage collection
1552 @item --print-gc-sections
1553 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1554 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1555 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1556 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1557 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1558 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1559 line.
1560
1561 @kindex --print-output-format
1562 @cindex output format
1563 @item --print-output-format
1564 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1565 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1566 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1567
1568 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1569 @cindex memory usage
1570 @item --print-memory-usage
1571 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1572 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1573 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1574 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1575 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1576
1577 @smallexample
1578 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1579 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1580 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1581 @end smallexample
1582
1583 @cindex help
1584 @cindex usage
1585 @kindex --help
1586 @item --help
1587 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1588
1589 @kindex --target-help
1590 @item --target-help
1591 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1592
1593 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1594 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1595 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1596 @option{-M} option, above.
1597
1598 @cindex memory usage
1599 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1600 @item --no-keep-memory
1601 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1602 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1603 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1604 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1605 while linking a large executable.
1606
1607 @kindex --no-undefined
1608 @kindex -z defs
1609 @item --no-undefined
1610 @itemx -z defs
1611 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1612 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1613 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1614 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1615 libraries being linked in.
1616
1617 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1618 @kindex -z muldefs
1619 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1620 @itemx -z muldefs
1621 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1622 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1623 first definition will be used.
1624
1625 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1626 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1627 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1628 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1629 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1630 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1631 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1632 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1633 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1634
1635 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1636 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1637 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1638 a shared library.
1639
1640 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1641 libraries specified at link time are that:
1642
1643 @itemize @bullet
1644 @item
1645 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1646 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1647 resolvable at load time.
1648 @item
1649 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1650 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1651
1652 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1653 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1654 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1655 appropriate memset function.
1656 @end itemize
1657
1658 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1659 @item --no-undefined-version
1660 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1661 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1662 will be issued instead.
1663
1664 @kindex --default-symver
1665 @item --default-symver
1666 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1667 exported symbols.
1668
1669 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1670 @item --default-imported-symver
1671 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1672 imported symbols.
1673
1674 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1675 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1676 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1677 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1678 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1679 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1680 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1681 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1682 inappropriate.
1683
1684 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1685 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1686 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1687 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1688
1689 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1690 @item --no-whole-archive
1691 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1692 archive files.
1693
1694 @cindex output file after errors
1695 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1696 @item --noinhibit-exec
1697 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1698 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1699 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1700 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1701
1702 @kindex -nostdlib
1703 @item -nostdlib
1704 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1705 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1706 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1707
1708 @ifclear SingleFormat
1709 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1710 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1711 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1712 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1713 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1714 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1715 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1716 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1717 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1718 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1719 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1720 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1721 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1722 @end ifclear
1723
1724 @kindex --out-implib
1725 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1726 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1727 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1728 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1729 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1730 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1731 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1732 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1733
1734 @kindex -pie
1735 @kindex --pic-executable
1736 @item -pie
1737 @itemx --pic-executable
1738 @cindex position independent executables
1739 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1740 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1741 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1742 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1743 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1744 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1745
1746 @kindex -qmagic
1747 @item -qmagic
1748 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1749
1750 @kindex -Qy
1751 @item -Qy
1752 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1753
1754 @kindex --relax
1755 @cindex synthesizing linker
1756 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1757 @cindex --no-relax
1758 @item --relax
1759 @itemx --no-relax
1760 An option with machine dependent effects.
1761 @ifset GENERIC
1762 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1763 @end ifset
1764 @ifset H8300
1765 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1766 @end ifset
1767 @ifset I960
1768 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1769 @end ifset
1770 @ifset XTENSA
1771 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1772 @end ifset
1773 @ifset M68HC11
1774 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1775 @end ifset
1776 @ifset NIOSII
1777 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1778 @end ifset
1779 @ifset POWERPC
1780 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1781 @end ifset
1782
1783 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1784 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1785 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1786 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1787 instructions, and combining constant values.
1788
1789 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1790 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1791 @ifset GENERIC
1792 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1793 family of processors.
1794 @end ifset
1795
1796 @ifset GENERIC
1797 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1798 but ignored.
1799 @end ifset
1800
1801 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1802 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1803
1804 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1805 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1806 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1807 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1808 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1809 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1810 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1811 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1812 @ifset GENERIC
1813 (such as VxWorks)
1814 @end ifset
1815 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1816 run-time memory.
1817
1818 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1819 or symbols needed for relocations.
1820
1821 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1822 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1823
1824 @ifset GENERIC
1825 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1826 @cindex runtime library search path
1827 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1828 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1829 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1830 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1831 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1832 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1833 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1834 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1835 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1836 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1837
1838 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1839 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1840 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1841 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1842 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1843 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1844 file systems.
1845
1846 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1847 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1848 the @option{-rpath} option.
1849 @end ifset
1850
1851 @ifset GENERIC
1852 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1853 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1854 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1855 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1856 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1857 of the input files.
1858
1859 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1860 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1861 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1862 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1863 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1864 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1865 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1866 appearing multiple times.
1867
1868 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1869 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1870 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1871 runtime linker would do.
1872
1873 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1874 libraries:
1875 @enumerate
1876 @item
1877 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1878 @item
1879 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1880 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1881 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1882 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1883 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1884 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1885 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1886 @item
1887 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1888 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1889 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1890 @item
1891 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1892 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1893 @item
1894 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1895 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1896 @item
1897 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1898 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1899 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1900 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1901 @item
1902 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1903 @item
1904 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1905 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1906 @end enumerate
1907
1908 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1909 warning and continue with the link.
1910 @end ifset
1911
1912 @kindex -shared
1913 @kindex -Bshareable
1914 @item -shared
1915 @itemx -Bshareable
1916 @cindex shared libraries
1917 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1918 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1919 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1920 undefined symbols in the link.
1921
1922 @kindex --sort-common
1923 @item --sort-common
1924 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1925 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1926 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1927 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1928 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1929 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1930 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1931 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1932
1933 @kindex --sort-section=name
1934 @item --sort-section=name
1935 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1936 patterns in the linker script.
1937
1938 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1939 @item --sort-section=alignment
1940 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1941 patterns in the linker script.
1942
1943 @kindex --split-by-file
1944 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1945 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1946 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1947 size of 1 if not given.
1948
1949 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1950 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1951 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1952 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1953 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1954 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1955 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1956 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1957 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1958 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1959 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1960 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1961
1962 @kindex --stats
1963 @item --stats
1964 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1965 as execution time and memory usage.
1966
1967 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1968 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1969 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1970 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1971 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1972
1973 @kindex --traditional-format
1974 @cindex traditional format
1975 @item --traditional-format
1976 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1977 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1978 use the traditional format instead.
1979
1980 @cindex dbx
1981 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1982 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1983 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1984 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1985 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1986 combine duplicate entries.
1987
1988 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1989 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1990 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1991 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1992 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1993 line.
1994 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1995 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1996 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1997 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1998 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1999
2000 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2001 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2002 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2003 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2004 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2005 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2006 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2007 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2008 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2009
2010 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2011 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2012 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2013 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2014 byte of the text segment.
2015
2016 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2017 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2018 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2019 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2020 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2021 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2022
2023 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2024 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2025 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2026 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2027 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2028
2029 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2030 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2031 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2032 values for @samp{method}:
2033
2034 @table @samp
2035 @item ignore-all
2036 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2037
2038 @item report-all
2039 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2040
2041 @item ignore-in-object-files
2042 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2043 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2044
2045 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2046 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2047 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2048 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2049 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2050 command line.
2051 @end table
2052
2053 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2054 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2055
2056 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2057 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2058 can change this to a warning.
2059
2060 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2061 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2062 @item --dll-verbose
2063 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2064 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2065 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2066 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2067 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2068
2069 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2070 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2071 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2072 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2073 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2074 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2075 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2076 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2077 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2078 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2079 @xref{WIN32}.
2080
2081 @kindex --warn-common
2082 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2083 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2084 @item --warn-common
2085 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2086 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2087 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2088 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2089 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2090 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2091
2092 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2093
2094 @table @samp
2095 @item int i = 1;
2096 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2097 file.
2098
2099 @item extern int i;
2100 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2101 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2102 variable somewhere.
2103
2104 @item int i;
2105 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2106 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2107 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2108 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2109 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2110 a definition of the same variable.
2111 @end table
2112
2113 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2114 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2115 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2116 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2117 a common symbol.
2118
2119 @enumerate
2120 @item
2121 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2122 definition for the symbol.
2123 @smallexample
2124 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2125 overridden by definition
2126 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2127 @end smallexample
2128
2129 @item
2130 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2131 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2132 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2133 @smallexample
2134 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2135 overriding common
2136 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2137 @end smallexample
2138
2139 @item
2140 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2141 @smallexample
2142 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2143 of `@var{symbol}'
2144 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2145 @end smallexample
2146
2147 @item
2148 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2149 @smallexample
2150 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2151 overridden by larger common
2152 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2153 @end smallexample
2154
2155 @item
2156 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2157 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2158 encountered in a different order.
2159 @smallexample
2160 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2161 overriding smaller common
2162 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2163 @end smallexample
2164 @end enumerate
2165
2166 @kindex --warn-constructors
2167 @item --warn-constructors
2168 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2169 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2170 detect the use of global constructors.
2171
2172 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2173 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2174 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2175 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2176 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2177 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2178 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2179 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2180 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2181 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2182 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2183 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2184 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2185
2186 @kindex --warn-once
2187 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2188 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2189 @item --warn-once
2190 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2191 which refers to it.
2192
2193 @kindex --warn-section-align
2194 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2195 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2196 @item --warn-section-align
2197 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2198 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2199 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2200 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2201 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2202
2203 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2204 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2205 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2206
2207 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2208 @item --warn-alternate-em
2209 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2210
2211 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2212 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2213 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2214 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2215 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2216
2217 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2218 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2219 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2220 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2221
2222 @kindex --whole-archive
2223 @cindex including an entire archive
2224 @item --whole-archive
2225 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2226 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2227 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2228 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2229 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2230 library. This option may be used more than once.
2231
2232 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2233 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2234 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2235 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2236 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2237
2238 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2239 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2240 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2241 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2242 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2243 @var{symbol}.
2244
2245 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2246 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2247 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2248 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2249
2250 Here is a trivial example:
2251
2252 @smallexample
2253 void *
2254 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2255 @{
2256 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2257 return __real_malloc (c);
2258 @}
2259 @end smallexample
2260
2261 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2262 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2263 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2264 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2265
2266 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2267 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2268 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2269 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2270 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2271
2272 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2273 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2274 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2275 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2276 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2277 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2278 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2279
2280 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2281 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2282 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2283 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2284 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2285
2286 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2287 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2288 @item --enable-new-dtags
2289 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2290 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2291 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2292 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2293 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2294 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2295 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2296 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2297
2298 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2299 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2300 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2301 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2302 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2303 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2304 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2305
2306 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2307 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2308 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2309 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2310 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2311 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2312 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2313
2314 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2315 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2316 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2317 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2318 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2319 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2320 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2321 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2322 On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2323 compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
2324 compress DWARF debug sections.
2325 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
2326 sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2327 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2328 and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2329 compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
2330 The default behaviour varies depending upon the target involved and
2331 the configure options used to build the toolchain. The default can be
2332 determined by examing the output from the linker's @option{--help} option.
2333
2334 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2335 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2336 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2337 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2338 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2339 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2340
2341 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2342 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2343 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2344 has been used.
2345
2346 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2347 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2348
2349 @kindex --build-id
2350 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2351 @item --build-id
2352 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2353 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2354 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2355 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2356 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2357 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2358 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2359 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2360 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2361 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2362 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2363
2364 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2365 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2366 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2367 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2368 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2369 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2370
2371 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2372 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2373 @end table
2374
2375 @c man end
2376
2377 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2378
2379 @c man begin OPTIONS
2380
2381 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2382 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2383 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2384 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2385 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2386 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2387 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2388 object file).
2389
2390 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2391 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2392 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2393 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2394
2395 @table @gcctabopt
2396
2397 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2398 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2399 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2400 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2401 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2402
2403 @kindex --base-file
2404 @item --base-file @var{file}
2405 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2406 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2407 @file{dlltool}.
2408 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2409
2410 @kindex --dll
2411 @item --dll
2412 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2413 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2414 file.
2415 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2416
2417 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2418 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2419 @item --enable-long-section-names
2420 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2421 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2422 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2423 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2424 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2425 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2426 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2427 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2428 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2429 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2430 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2431 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2432 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2433 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2434 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2435 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2436 image and not stripping symbols.
2437 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2438
2439 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2440 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2441 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2442 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2443 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2444 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2445 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2446 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2447 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2448 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2449 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2450 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2451 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2452 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2453 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2454 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2455 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2456 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2457
2458 @kindex --leading-underscore
2459 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2460 @item --leading-underscore
2461 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2462 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2463 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2464 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2465
2466 @cindex DLLs, creating
2467 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2468 @item --export-all-symbols
2469 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2470 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2471 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2472 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2473 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2474 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2475 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2476 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2477 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2478 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2479 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2480 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2481 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2482 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2483 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2484 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2485 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2486 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2487 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2488 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2489 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2490 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2491 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2492
2493 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2494 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2495 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2496 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2497 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2498
2499 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2500 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2501 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2502 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2503
2504 @kindex --file-alignment
2505 @item --file-alignment
2506 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2507 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2508 512.
2509 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2510
2511 @cindex heap size
2512 @kindex --heap
2513 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2514 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2515 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2516 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2517 committed.
2518 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2519
2520 @cindex image base
2521 @kindex --image-base
2522 @item --image-base @var{value}
2523 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2524 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2525 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2526 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2527 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2528 for dlls.
2529 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2530
2531 @kindex --kill-at
2532 @item --kill-at
2533 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2534 symbols before they are exported.
2535 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2536
2537 @kindex --large-address-aware
2538 @item --large-address-aware
2539 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2540 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2541 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2542 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2543 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2544 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2545
2546 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2547 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2548 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2549 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2550 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2551 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2552 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2553
2554 @kindex --major-image-version
2555 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2556 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2557 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2558
2559 @kindex --major-os-version
2560 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2561 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2562 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2563
2564 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2565 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2566 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2567 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2568
2569 @kindex --minor-image-version
2570 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2571 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2572 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2573
2574 @kindex --minor-os-version
2575 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2576 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2577 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2578
2579 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2580 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2581 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2582 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2583
2584 @cindex DEF files, creating
2585 @cindex DLLs, creating
2586 @kindex --output-def
2587 @item --output-def @var{file}
2588 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2589 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2590 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2591 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2592 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2593 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2594
2595 @cindex DLLs, creating
2596 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2597 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2598 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2599 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2600 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2601 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2602 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2603 execution are avoided.
2604 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2605
2606 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2607 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2608 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2609 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2610 default.
2611 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2612
2613 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2614 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2615 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2616 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2617 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2618 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2619 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2620 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2621 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2622 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2623
2624 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2625 @item --enable-auto-import
2626 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2627 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2628 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2629 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2630 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2631 specification published by Microsoft.
2632
2633 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2634 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2635 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2636 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2637 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2638
2639 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2640 see this message:
2641
2642 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2643 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2644
2645 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2646 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2647 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2648 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2649 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2650 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2651 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2652 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2653 the warning, and exit.
2654
2655 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2656 data type of the exported variable:
2657
2658 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2659 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2660 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2661
2662 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2663 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2664 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2665 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2666
2667 @example
2668 extern type extern_array[];
2669 extern_array[1] -->
2670 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2671 @end example
2672
2673 or
2674
2675 @example
2676 extern type extern_array[];
2677 extern_array[1] -->
2678 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2679 @end example
2680
2681 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2682 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2683
2684 @example
2685 extern struct s extern_struct;
2686 extern_struct.field -->
2687 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2688 @end example
2689
2690 or
2691
2692 @example
2693 extern long long extern_ll;
2694 extern_ll -->
2695 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2696 @end example
2697
2698 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2699 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2700 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2701 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2702 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2703 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2704 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2705 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2706
2707 Original:
2708 @example
2709 --foo.h
2710 extern int arr[];
2711 --foo.c
2712 #include "foo.h"
2713 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2714 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2715 @}
2716 @end example
2717
2718 Solution 1:
2719 @example
2720 --foo.h
2721 extern int arr[];
2722 --foo.c
2723 #include "foo.h"
2724 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2725 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2726 volatile int *parr = arr;
2727 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2728 @}
2729 @end example
2730
2731 Solution 2:
2732 @example
2733 --foo.h
2734 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2735 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2736 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2737 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2738 #else
2739 #define FOO_IMPORT
2740 #endif
2741 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2742 --foo.c
2743 #include "foo.h"
2744 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2745 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2746 @}
2747 @end example
2748
2749 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2750 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2751 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2752 functions).
2753 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2754
2755 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2756 @item --disable-auto-import
2757 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2758 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2759 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2760
2761 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2762 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2763 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2764 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2765 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2766 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2767 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2768
2769 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2770 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2771 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2772 DLLs.
2773 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2774
2775 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2776 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2777 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2778 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2779
2780 @kindex --section-alignment
2781 @item --section-alignment
2782 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2783 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2784 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2785
2786 @cindex stack size
2787 @kindex --stack
2788 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2789 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2790 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2791 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2792 committed.
2793 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2794
2795 @kindex --subsystem
2796 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2797 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2798 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2799 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2800 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2801 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2802 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2803 @var{which}.
2804 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2805
2806 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2807 of the PE file header:
2808 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2809
2810 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2811 @item --high-entropy-va
2812 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2813 (ASLR).
2814
2815 @kindex --dynamicbase
2816 @item --dynamicbase
2817 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2818 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2819 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2820
2821 @kindex --forceinteg
2822 @item --forceinteg
2823 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2824
2825 @kindex --nxcompat
2826 @item --nxcompat
2827 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2828 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2829
2830 @kindex --no-isolation
2831 @item --no-isolation
2832 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2833
2834 @kindex --no-seh
2835 @item --no-seh
2836 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2837 this image.
2838
2839 @kindex --no-bind
2840 @item --no-bind
2841 Do not bind this image.
2842
2843 @kindex --wdmdriver
2844 @item --wdmdriver
2845 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2846
2847 @kindex --tsaware
2848 @item --tsaware
2849 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2850
2851 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2852 @item --insert-timestamp
2853 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2854 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2855 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2856 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2857 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2858 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2859 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2860 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2861 identically.
2862 @end table
2863
2864 @c man end
2865
2866 @ifset C6X
2867 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2868
2869 @c man begin OPTIONS
2870
2871 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2872 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2873 all executables use an index of 0.
2874
2875 @table @gcctabopt
2876
2877 @kindex --dsbt-size
2878 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2879 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2880 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2881 entries.
2882
2883 @kindex --dsbt-index
2884 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2885 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2886 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2887 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2888 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2889
2890 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2891 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2892 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2893
2894 @end table
2895
2896 @c man end
2897 @end ifset
2898
2899 @ifset M68HC11
2900 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2901
2902 @c man begin OPTIONS
2903
2904 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2905 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2906
2907 @table @gcctabopt
2908
2909 @kindex --no-trampoline
2910 @item --no-trampoline
2911 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2912 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2913 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2914
2915 @kindex --bank-window
2916 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2917 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2918 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2919 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2920 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2921
2922 @end table
2923
2924 @c man end
2925 @end ifset
2926
2927 @ifset M68K
2928 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2929
2930 @c man begin OPTIONS
2931
2932 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2933 when linking for 68K targets.
2934
2935 @table @gcctabopt
2936
2937 @kindex --got
2938 @item --got=@var{type}
2939 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2940 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2941 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2942 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2943
2944 @end table
2945
2946 @c man end
2947 @end ifset
2948
2949 @ifset MIPS
2950 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2951
2952 @c man begin OPTIONS
2953
2954 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2955 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2956
2957 @table @gcctabopt
2958
2959 @kindex --insn32
2960 @item --insn32
2961 @kindex --no-insn32
2962 @itemx --no-insn32
2963 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2964 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2965 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2966 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2967 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2968 possible.
2969
2970 @end table
2971
2972 @c man end
2973 @end ifset
2974
2975 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2976 @node Environment
2977 @section Environment Variables
2978
2979 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2980
2981 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2982 @ifclear SingleFormat
2983 @code{GNUTARGET},
2984 @end ifclear
2985 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2986
2987 @ifclear SingleFormat
2988 @kindex GNUTARGET
2989 @cindex default input format
2990 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2991 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2992 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2993 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2994 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2995 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2996 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2997 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2998 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2999 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3000 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3001 @end ifclear
3002
3003 @kindex LDEMULATION
3004 @cindex default emulation
3005 @cindex emulation, default
3006 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3007 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3008 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3009 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3010 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3011 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3012 linker was configured.
3013
3014 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3015 @cindex demangling, default
3016 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3017 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3018 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3019 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3020 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3021 options.
3022
3023 @c man end
3024 @end ifset
3025
3026 @node Scripts
3027 @chapter Linker Scripts
3028
3029 @cindex scripts
3030 @cindex linker scripts
3031 @cindex command files
3032 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3033 written in the linker command language.
3034
3035 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3036 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3037 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3038 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3039 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3040 described below.
3041
3042 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3043 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3044 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3045 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3046 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3047
3048 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3049 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3050 default linker script.
3051
3052 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3053 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3054 Linker Scripts}.
3055
3056 @menu
3057 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3058 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3059 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3060 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3061 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3062 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3063 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3064 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3065 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3066 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3067 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3068 @end menu
3069
3070 @node Basic Script Concepts
3071 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3072 @cindex linker script concepts
3073 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3074 describe the linker script language.
3075
3076 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3077 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3078 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3079 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3080 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3081 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3082 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3083 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3084
3085 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3086 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3087 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3088 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3089 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3090 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3091 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3092 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3093 of debugging information.
3094
3095 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3096 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3097 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3098 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3099 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3100 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3101 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3102 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3103 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3104 RAM address would be the VMA.
3105
3106 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3107 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3108
3109 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3110 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3111 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3112 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3113 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3114 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3115 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3116
3117 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3118 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3119 option.
3120
3121 @node Script Format
3122 @section Linker Script Format
3123 @cindex linker script format
3124 Linker scripts are text files.
3125
3126 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3127 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3128 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3129 generally ignored.
3130
3131 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3132 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3133 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3134 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3135 file name.
3136
3137 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3138 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3139 to whitespace.
3140
3141 @node Simple Example
3142 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3143 @cindex linker script example
3144 @cindex example of linker script
3145 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3146
3147 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3148 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3149 memory layout of the output file.
3150
3151 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3152 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3153 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3154 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3155 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3156 your input files.
3157
3158 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3159 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3160 linker script which will do that:
3161 @smallexample
3162 SECTIONS
3163 @{
3164 . = 0x10000;
3165 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3166 . = 0x8000000;
3167 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3168 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3169 @}
3170 @end smallexample
3171
3172 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3173 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3174 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3175
3176 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3177 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3178 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3179 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3180 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3181 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3182 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3183
3184 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3185 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3186 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3187 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3188 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3189 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3190
3191 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3192 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3193 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3194
3195 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3196 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3197 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3198 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3199 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3200 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3201 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3202
3203 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3204 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3205 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3206 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3207 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3208 sections.
3209
3210 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3211
3212 @node Simple Commands
3213 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3214 @cindex linker script simple commands
3215 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3216
3217 @menu
3218 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3219 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3220 @ifclear SingleFormat
3221 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3222 @end ifclear
3223
3224 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3225 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3226 @end menu
3227
3228 @node Entry Point
3229 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3230 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3231 @cindex start of execution
3232 @cindex first instruction
3233 @cindex entry point
3234 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3235 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3236 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3237 @smallexample
3238 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3239 @end smallexample
3240
3241 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3242 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3243 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3244 @itemize @bullet
3245 @item
3246 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3247 @item
3248 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3249 @item
3250 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3251 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3252 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3253 @item
3254 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3255 @item
3256 The address @code{0}.
3257 @end itemize
3258
3259 @node File Commands
3260 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3261 @cindex linker script file commands
3262 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3263
3264 @table @code
3265 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3266 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3267 @cindex including a linker script
3268 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3269 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3270 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3271 10 levels deep.
3272
3273 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3274 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3275
3276 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3277 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3278 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3279 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3280 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3281 @cindex linker script input object files
3282 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3283 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3284
3285 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3286 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3287 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3288
3289 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3290 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3291
3292 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3293 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3294 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3295 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3296 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3297 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3298 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3299 as the first character in the filename path. See also the
3300 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3301
3302 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3303 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3304 @samp{-l}.
3305
3306 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3307 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3308 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3309
3310 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3311 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3312 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3313 @cindex grouping input files
3314 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3315 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3316 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3317 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3318
3319 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3320 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3321 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3322 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3323 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3324 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3325 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3326 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3327 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3328 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3329 setting afterwards.
3330
3331 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3332 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3333 @cindex output file name in linker script
3334 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3335 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3336 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3337 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3338 precedence.
3339
3340 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3341 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3342
3343 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3344 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3345 @cindex library search path in linker script
3346 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3347 @cindex search path in linker script
3348 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3349 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3350 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3351 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3352 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3353 the command line option are searched first.
3354
3355 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3356 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3357 @cindex first input file
3358 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3359 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3360 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3361 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3362 first file.
3363 @end table
3364
3365 @ifclear SingleFormat
3366 @node Format Commands
3367 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3368 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3369
3370 @table @code
3371 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3372 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3373 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3374 @cindex output file format in linker script
3375 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3376 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3377 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3378 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3379 line option takes precedence.
3380
3381 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3382 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3383 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3384 desired endianness.
3385
3386 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3387 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3388 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3389 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3390
3391 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3392 command:
3393 @smallexample
3394 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3395 @end smallexample
3396 This says that the default format for the output file is
3397 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3398 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3399 format.
3400
3401 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3402 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3403 @cindex input file format in linker script
3404 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3405 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3406 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3407 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3408 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3409 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3410 @end table
3411 @end ifclear
3412
3413 @node REGION_ALIAS
3414 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3415 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3416 @cindex region alias
3417 @cindex region names
3418
3419 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3420 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3421
3422 @smallexample
3423 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3424 @end smallexample
3425
3426 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3427 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3428 to memory regions. An example follows.
3429
3430 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3431 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3432 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3433 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3434 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3435 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3436 sections:
3437
3438 @itemize @bullet
3439 @item
3440 @code{.text} program code;
3441 @item
3442 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3443 @item
3444 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3445 @item
3446 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3447 @end itemize
3448
3449 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3450 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3451 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3452 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3453 @code{C}:
3454 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3455 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3456 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3457 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3458 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3459 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3460 @end multitable
3461 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3462 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3463 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3464 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3465
3466 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3467 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3468 memory layout:
3469 @smallexample
3470 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3471
3472 SECTIONS
3473 @{
3474 .text :
3475 @{
3476 *(.text)
3477 @} > REGION_TEXT
3478 .rodata :
3479 @{
3480 *(.rodata)
3481 rodata_end = .;
3482 @} > REGION_RODATA
3483 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3484 @{
3485 data_start = .;
3486 *(.data)
3487 @} > REGION_DATA
3488 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3489 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3490 .bss :
3491 @{
3492 *(.bss)
3493 @} > REGION_BSS
3494 @}
3495 @end smallexample
3496
3497 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3498 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3499 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3500 @table @code
3501 @item A
3502 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3503 @smallexample
3504 MEMORY
3505 @{
3506 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3507 @}
3508
3509 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3510 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3511 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3512 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3513 @end smallexample
3514 @item B
3515 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3516 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3517 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3518 @smallexample
3519 MEMORY
3520 @{
3521 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3522 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3523 @}
3524
3525 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3526 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3527 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3528 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3529 @end smallexample
3530 @item C
3531 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3532 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3533 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3534 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3535 @smallexample
3536 MEMORY
3537 @{
3538 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3539 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3540 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3541 @}
3542
3543 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3544 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3545 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3546 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3547 @end smallexample
3548 @end table
3549
3550 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3551 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3552 necessary:
3553 @smallexample
3554 #include <string.h>
3555
3556 extern char data_start [];
3557 extern char data_size [];
3558 extern char data_load_start [];
3559
3560 void copy_data(void)
3561 @{
3562 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3563 @{
3564 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3565 @}
3566 @}
3567 @end smallexample
3568
3569 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3570 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3571 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3572
3573 @table @code
3574 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3575 @kindex ASSERT
3576 @cindex assertion in linker script
3577 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3578 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3579
3580 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3581 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3582 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3583 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3584 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3585
3586 @smallexample
3587 .stack :
3588 @{
3589 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3590 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3591 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3592 @}
3593 @end smallexample
3594
3595 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3596 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3597 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3598
3599 @smallexample
3600 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3601 .stack :
3602 @{
3603 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3604 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3605 @}
3606 @end smallexample
3607
3608 will work.
3609
3610 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3611 @kindex EXTERN
3612 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3613 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3614 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3615 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3616 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3617 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3618
3619 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3620 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3621 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3622 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3623 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3624 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3625
3626 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3627 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3628 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3629 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3630 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3631 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3632
3633 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3634 @kindex INSERT
3635 @cindex insert user script into default script
3636 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3637 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3638 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3639 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3640 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3641 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3642 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3643 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3644 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3645 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3646 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3647 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3648 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3649
3650 @smallexample
3651 SECTIONS
3652 @{
3653 OVERLAY :
3654 @{
3655 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3656 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3657 @}
3658 @}
3659 INSERT AFTER .text;
3660 @end smallexample
3661
3662 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3663 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3664 @cindex cross references
3665 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3666 references among certain output sections.
3667
3668 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3669 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3670 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3671 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3672 a function defined in the other section.
3673
3674 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3675 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3676 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3677 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3678 names.
3679
3680 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3681 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3682 @cindex cross references
3683 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3684 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3685
3686 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3687 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3688 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3689 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3690 must never call back.
3691
3692 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3693 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3694 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3695 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3696 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3697 names, not input section names.
3698
3699 @ifclear SingleFormat
3700 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3701 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3702 @cindex machine architecture
3703 @cindex architecture
3704 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3705 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3706 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3707 the @samp{-f} option.
3708 @end ifclear
3709
3710 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3711 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3712 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3713 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3714 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3715 @xref{Expression Section}.
3716 @end table
3717
3718 @node Assignments
3719 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3720 @cindex assignment in scripts
3721 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3722 @cindex variables, defining
3723 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3724 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3725
3726 @menu
3727 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3728 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3729 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3730 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3731 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3732 @end menu
3733
3734 @node Simple Assignments
3735 @subsection Simple Assignments
3736
3737 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3738
3739 @table @code
3740 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3741 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3742 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3743 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3744 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3745 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3746 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3747 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3748 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3749 @end table
3750
3751 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3752 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3753 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3754
3755 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3756 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3757
3758 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3759
3760 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3761
3762 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3763 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3764 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3765
3766 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3767 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3768
3769 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3770 assignments may be used:
3771
3772 @smallexample
3773 floating_point = 0;
3774 SECTIONS
3775 @{
3776 .text :
3777 @{
3778 *(.text)
3779 _etext = .;
3780 @}
3781 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3782 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3783 @}
3784 @end smallexample
3785 @noindent
3786 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3787 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3788 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3789 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3790 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3791
3792 @node HIDDEN
3793 @subsection HIDDEN
3794 @cindex HIDDEN
3795 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3796 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3797
3798 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3799 @code{HIDDEN}:
3800
3801 @smallexample
3802 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3803 SECTIONS
3804 @{
3805 .text :
3806 @{
3807 *(.text)
3808 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3809 @}
3810 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3811 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3812 @}
3813 @end smallexample
3814 @noindent
3815 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3816
3817 @node PROVIDE
3818 @subsection PROVIDE
3819 @cindex PROVIDE
3820 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3821 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3822 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3823 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3824 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3825 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3826 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3827 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3828
3829 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3830 @smallexample
3831 SECTIONS
3832 @{
3833 .text :
3834 @{
3835 *(.text)
3836 _etext = .;
3837 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3838 @}
3839 @}
3840 @end smallexample
3841
3842 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3843 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3844 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3845 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3846 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3847 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3848
3849 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3850 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3851 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3852 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3853 hidden and won't be exported.
3854
3855 @node Source Code Reference
3856 @subsection Source Code Reference
3857
3858 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3859 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3860 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3861 symbol that does not have a value.
3862
3863 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3864 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3865 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3866 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3867 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3868 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3869 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3870 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3871
3872 @smallexample
3873 extern int foo;
3874 @end smallexample
3875
3876 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3877
3878 @smallexample
3879 _foo = 1000;
3880 @end smallexample
3881
3882 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3883 transformation has taken place.
3884
3885 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3886 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3887 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3888 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3889 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3890 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3891 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3892
3893 @smallexample
3894 int foo = 1000;
3895 @end smallexample
3896
3897 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3898 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3899 number 1000 is initially stored.
3900
3901 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3902 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3903 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3904 So:
3905
3906 @smallexample
3907 foo = 1;
3908 @end smallexample
3909
3910 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3911 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3912 address. Whereas:
3913
3914 @smallexample
3915 int * a = & foo;
3916 @end smallexample
3917
3918 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3919 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3920 the variable @samp{a}.
3921
3922 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3923 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3924 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3925
3926 @smallexample
3927 foo = 1000;
3928 @end smallexample
3929
3930 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3931 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3932 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3933 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3934 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3935
3936 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3937 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3938 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3939 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3940 linker script contains these declarations:
3941
3942 @smallexample
3943 @group
3944 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3945 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
3946 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3947 @end group
3948 @end smallexample
3949
3950 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3951
3952 @smallexample
3953 @group
3954 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3955
3956 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3957 @end group
3958 @end smallexample
3959
3960 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3961 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3962 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3963
3964 @smallexample
3965 @group
3966 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3967
3968 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3969 @end group
3970 @end smallexample
3971
3972 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3973 operators.
3974
3975 @node SECTIONS
3976 @section SECTIONS Command
3977 @kindex SECTIONS
3978 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3979 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3980
3981 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3982 @smallexample
3983 SECTIONS
3984 @{
3985 @var{sections-command}
3986 @var{sections-command}
3987 @dots{}
3988 @}
3989 @end smallexample
3990
3991 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3992
3993 @itemize @bullet
3994 @item
3995 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3996 @item
3997 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3998 @item
3999 an output section description
4000 @item
4001 an overlay description
4002 @end itemize
4003
4004 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4005 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4006 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4007 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4008 the layout of the output file.
4009
4010 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4011 below.
4012
4013 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4014 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4015 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4016 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4017 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4018 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4019
4020 @menu
4021 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4022 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4023 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4024 * Input Section:: Input section description
4025 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4026 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4027 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4028 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4029 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4030 @end menu
4031
4032 @node Output Section Description
4033 @subsection Output Section Description
4034 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4035 @smallexample
4036 @group
4037 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4038 [AT(@var{lma})]
4039 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4040 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4041 [@var{constraint}]
4042 @{
4043 @var{output-section-command}
4044 @var{output-section-command}
4045 @dots{}
4046 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4047 @end group
4048 @end smallexample
4049
4050 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4051
4052 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4053 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4054 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4055 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4056 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4057
4058 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4059
4060 @itemize @bullet
4061 @item
4062 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4063 @item
4064 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4065 @item
4066 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4067 @item
4068 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4069 @end itemize
4070
4071 @node Output Section Name
4072 @subsection Output Section Name
4073 @cindex name, section
4074 @cindex section name
4075 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4076 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4077 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4078 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4079 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4080 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4081 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4082 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4083 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4084 commas must be quoted.
4085
4086 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4087 Discarding}.
4088
4089 @node Output Section Address
4090 @subsection Output Section Address
4091 @cindex address, section
4092 @cindex section address
4093 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4094 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4095 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4096
4097 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4098 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4099 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4100 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4101 contained within the output section.
4102
4103 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4104
4105 @itemize @bullet
4106 @item
4107 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4108 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4109 in that region.
4110
4111 @item
4112 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4113 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4114 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4115 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4116
4117 @item
4118 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4119 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4120 counter.
4121 @end itemize
4122
4123 @noindent
4124 For example:
4125
4126 @smallexample
4127 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4128 @end smallexample
4129
4130 @noindent
4131 and
4132
4133 @smallexample
4134 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4135 @end smallexample
4136
4137 @noindent
4138 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4139 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4140 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4141 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4142 input sections.
4143
4144 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4145 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4146 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4147 do something like this:
4148 @smallexample
4149 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4150 @end smallexample
4151 @noindent
4152 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4153 aligned upward to the specified value.
4154
4155 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4156 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4157 sections are ignored).
4158
4159 @node Input Section
4160 @subsection Input Section Description
4161 @cindex input sections
4162 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4163 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4164
4165 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4166 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4167 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4168 map the input files into your memory layout.
4169
4170 @menu
4171 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4172 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4173 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4174 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4175 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4176 @end menu
4177
4178 @node Input Section Basics
4179 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4180 @cindex input section basics
4181 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4182 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4183
4184 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4185 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4186
4187 The most common input section description is to include all input
4188 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4189 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4190 @smallexample
4191 *(.text)
4192 @end smallexample
4193 @noindent
4194 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4195 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4196 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4197 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4198 example:
4199 @smallexample
4200 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4201 @end smallexample
4202 @noindent
4203 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4204 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4205 placed inside the section list, for example:
4206 @smallexample
4207 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4208 @end smallexample
4209 @noindent
4210 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4211 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4212 more than one section, as described below.
4213
4214 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4215 @smallexample
4216 *(.text .rdata)
4217 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4218 @end smallexample
4219 @noindent
4220 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4221 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4222 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4223 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4224 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4225 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4226
4227 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4228 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4229 immediately following section, for example:
4230 @smallexample
4231 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4232 @end smallexample
4233 @noindent
4234 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4235 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4236 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4237 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4238 could be modified to:
4239 @smallexample
4240 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4241 @end smallexample
4242 @noindent
4243 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4244 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4245 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4246 @smallexample
4247 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4248 @end smallexample
4249
4250 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4251 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4252 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4253 @smallexample
4254 data.o(.data)
4255 @end smallexample
4256
4257 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4258 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4259
4260 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4261
4262 @smallexample
4263 @group
4264 SECTIONS @{
4265 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4266 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4267 @}
4268 @end group
4269 @end smallexample
4270
4271 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4272 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4273 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4274 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4275 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4276
4277 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4278 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4279 with no whitespace around the colon.
4280
4281 @table @samp
4282 @item archive:file
4283 matches file within archive
4284 @item archive:
4285 matches the whole archive
4286 @item :file
4287 matches file but not one in an archive
4288 @end table
4289
4290 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4291 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4292 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4293 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4294 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4295 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4296 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4297 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4298 command.
4299
4300 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4301 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4302 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4303 @smallexample
4304 data.o
4305 @end smallexample
4306
4307 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4308 and does not contain any wild card
4309 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4310 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4311 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4312 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4313 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4314 the archive search path.
4315
4316 @node Input Section Wildcards
4317 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4318 @cindex input section wildcards
4319 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4320 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4321 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4322 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4323 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4324
4325 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4326 pattern for the file name.
4327
4328 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4329
4330 @table @samp
4331 @item *
4332 matches any number of characters
4333 @item ?
4334 matches any single character
4335 @item [@var{chars}]
4336 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4337 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4338 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4339 @item \
4340 quotes the following character
4341 @end table
4342
4343 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4344 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4345 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4346 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4347 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4348 a @samp{/} character.
4349
4350 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4351 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4352 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4353
4354 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4355 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4356 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4357 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4358 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4359 @smallexample
4360 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4361 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4362 @end smallexample
4363
4364 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4365 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4366 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4367 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4368 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4369 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4370 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4371
4372 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4373 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4374 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4375 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4376 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4377 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4378
4379 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4380 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4381 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4382 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4383 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4384
4385 @cindex SORT
4386 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4387
4388 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4389 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4390
4391 @enumerate
4392 @item
4393 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4394 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4395 sections have the same name.
4396 @item
4397 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4398 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4399 sections have the same alignment.
4400 @item
4401 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4402 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4403 @item
4404 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4405 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4406 @item
4407 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4408 @end enumerate
4409
4410 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4411 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4412 takes precedence over the command line option.
4413
4414 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4415 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4416 treated as nested sorting command.
4417
4418 @enumerate
4419 @item
4420 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4421 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4422 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4423 @item
4424 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4425 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4426 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4427 @end enumerate
4428
4429 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4430 command line option will be ignored.
4431
4432 @cindex SORT_NONE
4433 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4434 section sorting option.
4435
4436 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4437 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4438 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4439
4440 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4441 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4442 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4443 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4444 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4445 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4446 @smallexample
4447 @group
4448 SECTIONS @{
4449 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4450 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4451 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4452 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4453 @}
4454 @end group
4455 @end smallexample
4456
4457 @node Input Section Common
4458 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4459 @cindex common symbol placement
4460 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4461 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4462 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4463 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4464 named @samp{COMMON}.
4465
4466 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4467 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4468 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4469 input files are placed in another section.
4470
4471 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4472 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4473 @smallexample
4474 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4475 @end smallexample
4476
4477 @cindex scommon section
4478 @cindex small common symbols
4479 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4480 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4481 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4482 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4483 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4484 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4485 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4486 locations.
4487
4488 @cindex [COMMON]
4489 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4490 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4491 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4492
4493 @node Input Section Keep
4494 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4495 @cindex KEEP
4496 @cindex garbage collection
4497 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4498 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4499 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4500 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4501 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4502
4503 @node Input Section Example
4504 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4505 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4506 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4507 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4508 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4509 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4510 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4511 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4512 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4513 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4514
4515 @smallexample
4516 @group
4517 SECTIONS @{
4518 outputa 0x10000 :
4519 @{
4520 all.o
4521 foo.o (.input1)
4522 @}
4523 @end group
4524 @group
4525 outputb :
4526 @{
4527 foo.o (.input2)
4528 foo1.o (.input1)
4529 @}
4530 @end group
4531 @group
4532 outputc :
4533 @{
4534 *(.input1)
4535 *(.input2)
4536 @}
4537 @}
4538 @end group
4539 @end smallexample
4540
4541 @node Output Section Data
4542 @subsection Output Section Data
4543 @cindex data
4544 @cindex section data
4545 @cindex output section data
4546 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4547 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4548 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4549 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4550 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4551 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4552 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4553 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4554 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4555 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4556 counter.
4557
4558 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4559 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4560 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4561 stored.
4562
4563 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4564 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4565 @smallexample
4566 BYTE(1)
4567 LONG(addr)
4568 @end smallexample
4569
4570 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4571 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4572 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4573 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4574 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4575
4576 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4577 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4578 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4579 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4580 endianness of the first input object file.
4581
4582 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4583 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4584 @smallexample
4585 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4586 @end smallexample
4587 whereas this will work:
4588 @smallexample
4589 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4590 @end smallexample
4591
4592 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4593 @cindex holes, filling
4594 @cindex unspecified memory
4595 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4596 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4597 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4598 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4599 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4600 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4601 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4602 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4603 different parts of an output section.
4604
4605 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4606 value @samp{0x90}:
4607 @smallexample
4608 FILL(0x90909090)
4609 @end smallexample
4610
4611 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4612 section attribute, but it only affects the
4613 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4614 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4615 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4616 expression.
4617
4618 @node Output Section Keywords
4619 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4620 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4621 commands.
4622
4623 @table @code
4624 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4625 @cindex input filename symbols
4626 @cindex filename symbols
4627 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4628 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4629 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4630 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4631 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4632
4633 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4634 normally used for any other object file format.
4635
4636 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4637 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4638 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4639 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4640 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4641 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4642 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4643 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4644 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4645 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4646 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4647 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4648 ignored for other object file formats.
4649
4650 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4651 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4652 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4653 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4654 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4655 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4656 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4657 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4658 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4659 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4660 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4661 @code{exit}.
4662
4663 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4664 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4665 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4666 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4667 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4668 runtime code expects to see.
4669
4670 @smallexample
4671 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4672 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4673 *(.ctors)
4674 LONG(0)
4675 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4676 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4677 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4678 *(.dtors)
4679 LONG(0)
4680 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4681 @end smallexample
4682
4683 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4684 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4685 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4686 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4687 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4688 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4689 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4690 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4691
4692 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4693 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4694 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4695 scripts.
4696
4697 @end table
4698
4699 @node Output Section Discarding
4700 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4701 @cindex discarding sections
4702 @cindex sections, discarding
4703 @cindex removing sections
4704 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4705 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4706 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4707 @smallexample
4708 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4709 @end smallexample
4710 @noindent
4711 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4712 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4713 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4714 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4715 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4716 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4717 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4718 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4719 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4720
4721 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4722 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4723 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4724 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4725 section is discarded.
4726
4727 @cindex /DISCARD/
4728 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4729 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4730 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4731
4732 @node Output Section Attributes
4733 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4734 @cindex output section attributes
4735 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4736 like this:
4737
4738 @smallexample
4739 @group
4740 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4741 [AT(@var{lma})]
4742 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4743 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4744 [@var{constraint}]
4745 @{
4746 @var{output-section-command}
4747 @var{output-section-command}
4748 @dots{}
4749 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4750 @end group
4751 @end smallexample
4752
4753 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4754 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4755 remaining section attributes.
4756
4757 @menu
4758 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4759 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4760 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4761 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4762 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4763 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4764 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4765 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4766 @end menu
4767
4768 @node Output Section Type
4769 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4770 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4771 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4772
4773 @table @code
4774 @item NOLOAD
4775 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4776 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4777 @item DSECT
4778 @itemx COPY
4779 @itemx INFO
4780 @itemx OVERLAY
4781 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4782 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4783 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4784 section when the program is run.
4785 @end table
4786
4787 @kindex NOLOAD
4788 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4789 @cindex loading, preventing
4790 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4791 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4792 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4793 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4794 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4795 @smallexample
4796 @group
4797 SECTIONS @{
4798 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4799 @dots{}
4800 @}
4801 @end group
4802 @end smallexample
4803
4804 @node Output Section LMA
4805 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4806 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4807 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4808 @cindex load address
4809 @cindex section load address
4810 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4811 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4812 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4813 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4814 address is optional.
4815
4816 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4817 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4818 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4819 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4820 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4821
4822 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4823 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4824 load address:
4825
4826 @itemize @bullet
4827 @item
4828 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4829 the LMA address as well.
4830
4831 @item
4832 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4833
4834 @item
4835 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4836 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4837 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4838 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4839 the last section in the located region.
4840
4841 @item
4842 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4843 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4844
4845 @item
4846 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4847 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4848 @end itemize
4849
4850 @cindex ROM initialized data
4851 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4852 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4853 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4854 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4855 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4856 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4857 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4858 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4859 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4860
4861 @smallexample
4862 @group
4863 SECTIONS
4864 @{
4865 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4866 .mdata 0x2000 :
4867 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4868 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4869 .bss 0x3000 :
4870 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4871 @}
4872 @end group
4873 @end smallexample
4874
4875 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4876 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4877 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4878 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4879 script.
4880
4881 @smallexample
4882 @group
4883 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4884 char *src = &_etext;
4885 char *dst = &_data;
4886
4887 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4888 while (dst < &_edata)
4889 *dst++ = *src++;
4890
4891 /* Zero bss. */
4892 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4893 *dst = 0;
4894 @end group
4895 @end smallexample
4896
4897 @node Forced Output Alignment
4898 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4899 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4900 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4901 @cindex output section alignment
4902 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4903 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4904 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4905
4906 @node Forced Input Alignment
4907 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4908 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4909 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4910 @cindex input section alignment
4911 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4912 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4913 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4914
4915 @node Output Section Constraint
4916 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4917 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4918 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4919 @cindex constraints on output sections
4920 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4921 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4922 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4923 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4924
4925 @node Output Section Region
4926 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4927 @kindex >@var{region}
4928 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4929 @cindex memory regions and sections
4930 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4931 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4932
4933 Here is a simple example:
4934 @smallexample
4935 @group
4936 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4937 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4938 @end group
4939 @end smallexample
4940
4941 @node Output Section Phdr
4942 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4943 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4944 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4945 @cindex program headers and sections
4946 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4947 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4948 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4949 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4950 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4951 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4952
4953 Here is a simple example:
4954 @smallexample
4955 @group
4956 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4957 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4958 @end group
4959 @end smallexample
4960
4961 @node Output Section Fill
4962 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4963 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4964 @cindex section fill pattern
4965 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4966 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4967 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4968 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4969 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4970 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4971 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4972 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4973 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4974 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4975 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4976 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4977 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4978
4979 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4980 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4981
4982 Here is a simple example:
4983 @smallexample
4984 @group
4985 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4986 @end group
4987 @end smallexample
4988
4989 @node Overlay Description
4990 @subsection Overlay Description
4991 @kindex OVERLAY
4992 @cindex overlays
4993 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4994 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4995 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4996 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4997 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4998 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4999 than another.
5000
5001 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5002 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5003 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5004 command is as follows:
5005 @smallexample
5006 @group
5007 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5008 @{
5009 @var{secname1}
5010 @{
5011 @var{output-section-command}
5012 @var{output-section-command}
5013 @dots{}
5014 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5015 @var{secname2}
5016 @{
5017 @var{output-section-command}
5018 @var{output-section-command}
5019 @dots{}
5020 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5021 @dots{}
5022 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5023 @end group
5024 @end smallexample
5025
5026 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5027 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5028 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5029 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5030 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5031 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5032
5033 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5034 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5035
5036 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5037 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5038 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5039 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5040 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5041 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5042
5043 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5044 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5045 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5046 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5047 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5048
5049 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5050 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5051 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5052 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5053 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5054 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5055 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5056
5057 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5058 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5059
5060 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5061 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5062 @smallexample
5063 @group
5064 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5065 @{
5066 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5067 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5068 @}
5069 @end group
5070 @end smallexample
5071 @noindent
5072 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5073 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5074 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5075 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5076 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5077 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5078
5079 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5080 like the following.
5081
5082 @smallexample
5083 @group
5084 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5085 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5086 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5087 @end group
5088 @end smallexample
5089
5090 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5091 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5092 example could have been written identically as follows.
5093
5094 @smallexample
5095 @group
5096 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5097 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5098 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5099 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5100 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5101 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5102 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5103 @end group
5104 @end smallexample
5105
5106 @node MEMORY
5107 @section MEMORY Command
5108 @kindex MEMORY
5109 @cindex memory regions
5110 @cindex regions of memory
5111 @cindex allocating memory
5112 @cindex discontinuous memory
5113 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5114 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5115
5116 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5117 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5118 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5119 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5120 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5121 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5122 around to fit into the available regions.
5123
5124 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5125 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5126 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5127 @code{MEMORY} is:
5128 @smallexample
5129 @group
5130 MEMORY
5131 @{
5132 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5133 @dots{}
5134 @}
5135 @end group
5136 @end smallexample
5137
5138 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5139 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5140 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5141 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5142 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5143 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5144 command.
5145
5146 @cindex memory region attributes
5147 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5148 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5149 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5150 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5151 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5152 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5153 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5154
5155 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5156 @table @samp
5157 @item R
5158 Read-only section
5159 @item W
5160 Read/write section
5161 @item X
5162 Executable section
5163 @item A
5164 Allocatable section
5165 @item I
5166 Initialized section
5167 @item L
5168 Same as @samp{I}
5169 @item !
5170 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5171 @end table
5172
5173 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5174 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5175 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5176 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5177 attributes.
5178
5179 @kindex ORIGIN =
5180 @kindex o =
5181 @kindex org =
5182 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5183 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5184 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5185 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5186 @code{ORG}).
5187
5188 @kindex LENGTH =
5189 @kindex len =
5190 @kindex l =
5191 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5192 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5193 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5194 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5195
5196 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5197 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5198 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5199 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5200 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5201 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5202 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5203 region.
5204
5205 @smallexample
5206 @group
5207 MEMORY
5208 @{
5209 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5210 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5211 @}
5212 @end group
5213 @end smallexample
5214
5215 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5216 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5217 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5218 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5219 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5220 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5221 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5222 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5223 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5224
5225 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5226 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5227 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5228
5229 @smallexample
5230 @group
5231 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5232 @end group
5233 @end smallexample
5234
5235 @node PHDRS
5236 @section PHDRS Command
5237 @kindex PHDRS
5238 @cindex program headers
5239 @cindex ELF program headers
5240 @cindex program segments
5241 @cindex segments, ELF
5242 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5243 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5244 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5245 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5246
5247 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5248 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5249 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5250 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5251 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5252
5253 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5254 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5255 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5256 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5257 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5258
5259 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5260 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5261 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5262
5263 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5264 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5265
5266 @smallexample
5267 @group
5268 PHDRS
5269 @{
5270 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5271 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5272 @}
5273 @end group
5274 @end smallexample
5275
5276 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5277 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5278 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5279 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5280 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5281 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5282
5283 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5284 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5285 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5286 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5287 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5288 Section Phdr}.
5289
5290 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5291 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5292 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5293 contain the section.
5294
5295 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5296 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5297 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5298 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5299 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5300 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5301 segment at all.
5302
5303 @kindex FILEHDR
5304 @kindex PHDRS
5305 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5306 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5307 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5308 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5309 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5310 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5311 these keywords.
5312
5313 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5314 value of the keyword.
5315
5316 @table @asis
5317 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5318 Indicates an unused program header.
5319
5320 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5321 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5322 the file.
5323
5324 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5325 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5326
5327 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5328 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5329 found.
5330
5331 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5332 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5333
5334 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5335 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5336 ABI.
5337
5338 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5339 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5340
5341 @item @var{expression}
5342 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5343 be used for types not defined above.
5344 @end table
5345
5346 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5347 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5348 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5349 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5350 output section attribute.
5351
5352 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5353 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5354 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5355 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5356 header.
5357
5358 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5359 headers used on a native ELF system.
5360
5361 @example
5362 @group
5363 PHDRS
5364 @{
5365 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5366 interp PT_INTERP ;
5367 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5368 data PT_LOAD ;
5369 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5370 @}
5371
5372 SECTIONS
5373 @{
5374 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5375 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5376 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5377 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5378 @dots{}
5379 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5380 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5381 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5382 @dots{}
5383 @}
5384 @end group
5385 @end example
5386
5387 @node VERSION
5388 @section VERSION Command
5389 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5390 @cindex symbol versions
5391 @cindex version script
5392 @cindex versions of symbols
5393 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5394 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5395 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5396 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5397 shared library.
5398
5399 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5400 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5401 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5402
5403 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5404 @smallexample
5405 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5406 @end smallexample
5407
5408 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5409 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5410 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5411 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5412 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5413 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5414 library.
5415
5416 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5417 examples.
5418
5419 @smallexample
5420 VERS_1.1 @{
5421 global:
5422 foo1;
5423 local:
5424 old*;
5425 original*;
5426 new*;
5427 @};
5428
5429 VERS_1.2 @{
5430 foo2;
5431 @} VERS_1.1;
5432
5433 VERS_2.0 @{
5434 bar1; bar2;
5435 extern "C++" @{
5436 ns::*;
5437 "f(int, double)";
5438 @};
5439 @} VERS_1.2;
5440 @end smallexample
5441
5442 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5443 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5444 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5445 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5446 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5447 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5448 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5449 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5450 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5451 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5452
5453 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5454 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5455 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5456
5457 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5458 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5459 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5460
5461 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5462 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5463 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5464 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5465 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5466 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5467 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5468 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5469 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5470
5471 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5472 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5473 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5474 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5475
5476 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5477 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5478 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5479 won't.
5480
5481 @smallexample
5482 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5483 @end smallexample
5484
5485 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5486 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5487 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5488 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5489 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5490 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5491 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5492 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5493 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5494 search for each symbol reference.
5495
5496 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5497 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5498 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5499 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5500 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5501 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5502 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5503 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5504 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5505
5506 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5507 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5508 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5509 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5510 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5511 @smallexample
5512 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5513 @end smallexample
5514 @noindent
5515 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5516 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5517 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5518 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5519 takes precedence over a version script.
5520
5521 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5522 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5523 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5524 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5525 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5526
5527 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5528 source file. Here is an example:
5529
5530 @smallexample
5531 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5532 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5533 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5534 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5535 @end smallexample
5536
5537 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5538 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5539 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5540 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5541
5542 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5543 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5544 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5545 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5546 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5547 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5548
5549 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5550 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5551 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5552 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5553
5554 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5555
5556 @smallexample
5557 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5558 @end smallexample
5559
5560 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5561 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5562 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5563 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5564 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5565
5566 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5567 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5568 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5569 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5570 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5571 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5572 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5573 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5574 expect when you upgrade.
5575
5576 @node Expressions
5577 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5578 @cindex expressions
5579 @cindex arithmetic
5580 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5581 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5582 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5583 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5584
5585 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5586
5587 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5588 expressions.
5589
5590 @menu
5591 * Constants:: Constants
5592 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5593 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5594 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5595 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5596 * Operators:: Operators
5597 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5598 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5599 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5600 @end menu
5601
5602 @node Constants
5603 @subsection Constants
5604 @cindex integer notation
5605 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5606 All constants are integers.
5607
5608 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5609 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5610 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5611 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5612 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5613 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5614
5615 @cindex scaled integers
5616 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5617 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5618 @cindex suffixes for integers
5619 @cindex integer suffixes
5620 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5621 constant by
5622 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5623 @ifnottex
5624 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5625 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5626 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5627 @end ifnottex
5628 @tex
5629 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5630 @end tex
5631 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5632 respectively. For example, the following
5633 all refer to the same quantity:
5634
5635 @smallexample
5636 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5637 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5638 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5639 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5640 @end smallexample
5641
5642 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5643 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5644
5645 @node Symbolic Constants
5646 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5647 @cindex symbolic constants
5648 @kindex CONSTANT
5649 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5650 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5651
5652 @table @code
5653 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5654 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5655 The target's maximum page size.
5656
5657 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5658 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5659 The target's default page size.
5660 @end table
5661
5662 So for example:
5663
5664 @smallexample
5665 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5666 @end smallexample
5667
5668 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5669 supported by the target.
5670
5671 @node Symbols
5672 @subsection Symbol Names
5673 @cindex symbol names
5674 @cindex names
5675 @cindex quoted symbol names
5676 @kindex "
5677 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5678 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5679 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5680 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5681 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5682 @smallexample
5683 "SECTION" = 9;
5684 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5685 @end smallexample
5686
5687 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5688 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5689 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5690
5691 @node Orphan Sections
5692 @subsection Orphan Sections
5693 @cindex orphan
5694 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5695 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5696 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5697 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5698 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5699 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5700 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5701 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5702 at the end of the file.
5703
5704 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5705 well as section flag.
5706
5707 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5708 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5709 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5710
5711 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5712 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5713 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5714 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5715 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5716 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5717 character.
5718
5719 @node Location Counter
5720 @subsection The Location Counter
5721 @kindex .
5722 @cindex dot
5723 @cindex location counter
5724 @cindex current output location
5725 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5726 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5727 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5728 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5729 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5730
5731 @cindex holes
5732 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5733 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5734 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5735 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5736 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5737
5738 @smallexample
5739 SECTIONS
5740 @{
5741 output :
5742 @{
5743 file1(.text)
5744 . = . + 1000;
5745 file2(.text)
5746 . += 1000;
5747 file3(.text)
5748 @} = 0x12345678;
5749 @}
5750 @end smallexample
5751 @noindent
5752 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5753 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5754 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5755 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5756 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5757 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5758
5759 @cindex dot inside sections
5760 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5761 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5762 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5763 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5764 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5765 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5766
5767 @smallexample
5768 SECTIONS
5769 @{
5770 . = 0x100
5771 .text: @{
5772 *(.text)
5773 . = 0x200
5774 @}
5775 . = 0x500
5776 .data: @{
5777 *(.data)
5778 . += 0x600
5779 @}
5780 @}
5781 @end smallexample
5782
5783 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5784 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5785 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5786 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5787 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5788 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5789 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5790 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5791
5792 @cindex dot outside sections
5793 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5794 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5795 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5796
5797 @smallexample
5798 SECTIONS
5799 @{
5800 start_of_text = . ;
5801 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5802 end_of_text = . ;
5803
5804 start_of_data = . ;
5805 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5806 end_of_data = . ;
5807 @}
5808 @end smallexample
5809
5810 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5811 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5812 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5813 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5814 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5815 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5816 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5817 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5818 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5819 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5820 as follows:
5821
5822 @smallexample
5823 SECTIONS
5824 @{
5825 start_of_text = . ;
5826 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5827 end_of_text = . ;
5828
5829 start_of_data = . ;
5830 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5831 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5832 end_of_data = . ;
5833 @}
5834 @end smallexample
5835
5836 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5837 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5838 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5839 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5840 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5841 section. So you could write:
5842
5843 @smallexample
5844 SECTIONS
5845 @{
5846 start_of_text = . ;
5847 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5848 end_of_text = . ;
5849
5850 . = . ;
5851 start_of_data = . ;
5852 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5853 end_of_data = . ;
5854 @}
5855 @end smallexample
5856
5857 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5858 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5859
5860 @need 2000
5861 @node Operators
5862 @subsection Operators
5863 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5864 @cindex arithmetic operators
5865 @cindex precedence in expressions
5866 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5867 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5868 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5869 @ifnottex
5870 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5871 @smallexample
5872 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5873 (highest)
5874 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5875 2 left * / %
5876 3 left + -
5877 4 left >> <<
5878 5 left == != > < <= >=
5879 6 left &
5880 7 left |
5881 8 left &&
5882 9 left ||
5883 10 right ? :
5884 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5885 (lowest)
5886 @end smallexample
5887 Notes:
5888 (1) Prefix operators
5889 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5890 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5891 @end ifnottex
5892 @tex
5893 \vskip \baselineskip
5894 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5895 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5896 \hrule
5897 \halign
5898 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5899 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5900 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5901 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5902 \noalign{\hrule}
5903 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5904 &highest&&&&&\cr
5905 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5906 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5907 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5908 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5909 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5910 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5911 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5912 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5913 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5914 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5915 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5916 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5917 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5918 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5919 \hrule}
5920 @end tex
5921 @iftex
5922 {
5923 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5924 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5925 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5926 }
5927 @end iftex
5928 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5929
5930 @node Evaluation
5931 @subsection Evaluation
5932 @cindex lazy evaluation
5933 @cindex expression evaluation order
5934 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5935 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5936
5937 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5938 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5939 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5940 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5941
5942 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5943 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5944 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5945 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5946
5947 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5948 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5949 allocation.
5950
5951 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5952 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5953
5954 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5955 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5956 following
5957 @smallexample
5958 @group
5959 SECTIONS
5960 @{
5961 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5962 @{ *(.text) @}
5963 @}
5964 @end group
5965 @end smallexample
5966 @noindent
5967 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5968 address}.
5969
5970 @node Expression Section
5971 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5972 @cindex expression sections
5973 @cindex absolute expressions
5974 @cindex relative expressions
5975 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5976 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5977 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5978 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5979 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5980 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5981 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5982 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5983 operations.
5984
5985 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5986 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5987 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5988 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5989 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5990 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5991 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5992 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5993 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5994 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5995 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5996 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5997 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5998 everywhere.
5999
6000 In the following simple example,
6001
6002 @smallexample
6003 @group
6004 SECTIONS
6005 @{
6006 . = 0x100;
6007 __executable_start = 0x100;
6008 .data :
6009 @{
6010 . = 0x10;
6011 __data_start = 0x10;
6012 *(.data)
6013 @}
6014 @dots{}
6015 @}
6016 @end group
6017 @end smallexample
6018
6019 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6020 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6021 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6022 section in the second two assignments.
6023
6024 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6025 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6026
6027 @itemize @bullet
6028 @item
6029 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6030 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6031 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6032 @item
6033 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6034 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6035 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6036 @item
6037 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6038 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6039 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6040 before applying the operator.
6041 @end itemize
6042
6043 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6044
6045 @itemize @bullet
6046 @item
6047 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6048 @item
6049 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6050 @item
6051 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6052 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6053 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6054 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6055 but an absolute address otherwise.
6056 @item
6057 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6058 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6059 section as the relative operand(s).
6060 @item
6061 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6062 conversions) is an absolute address.
6063 @end itemize
6064
6065 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6066 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6067 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6068 section @samp{.data}:
6069 @smallexample
6070 SECTIONS
6071 @{
6072 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6073 @}
6074 @end smallexample
6075 @noindent
6076 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6077 @samp{.data} section.
6078
6079 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6080 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6081
6082 @node Builtin Functions
6083 @subsection Builtin Functions
6084 @cindex functions in expressions
6085 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6086 use in linker script expressions.
6087
6088 @table @code
6089 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6090 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6091 @cindex expression, absolute
6092 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6093 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6094 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6095 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6096
6097 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6098 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6099 @cindex section address in expression
6100 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6101 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6102 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6103 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6104 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6105 the other two will be absolute:
6106 @smallexample
6107 @group
6108 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6109 .output1 :
6110 @{
6111 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6112 @dots{}
6113 @}
6114 .output :
6115 @{
6116 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6117 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6118 @}
6119 @dots{} @}
6120 @end group
6121 @end smallexample
6122
6123 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6124 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6125 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6126 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6127 @cindex round up location counter
6128 @cindex align location counter
6129 @cindex round up expression
6130 @cindex align expression
6131 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6132 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6133 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6134 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6135 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6136 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6137
6138 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6139 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6140 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6141 input sections:
6142 @smallexample
6143 @group
6144 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6145 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6146 *(.data)
6147 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6148 @}
6149 @dots{} @}
6150 @end group
6151 @end smallexample
6152 @noindent
6153 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6154 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6155 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6156 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6157
6158 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6159
6160 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6161 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6162 @cindex section alignment
6163 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6164 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6165 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6166 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6167 value in that section.
6168 @smallexample
6169 @group
6170 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6171 .output @{
6172 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6173 @dots{}
6174 @}
6175 @dots{} @}
6176 @end group
6177 @end smallexample
6178
6179 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6180 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6181 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6182 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6183 section.
6184
6185 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6186 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6187 This is equivalent to either
6188 @smallexample
6189 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6190 @end smallexample
6191 or
6192 @smallexample
6193 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6194 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6195 @end smallexample
6196 @noindent
6197 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6198 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6199 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6200 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6201 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6202 bytes in the on-disk file.
6203
6204 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6205 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6206 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6207 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6208 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6209
6210 @noindent
6211 Example:
6212 @smallexample
6213 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6214 @end smallexample
6215
6216 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6217 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6218 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6219 evaluation purposes.
6220
6221 @smallexample
6222 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6223 @end smallexample
6224
6225 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6226 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6227 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6228 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6229 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6230 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6231 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6232 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6233 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6234 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6235 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6236 section alignment.
6237
6238 @smallexample
6239 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6240 @end smallexample
6241
6242 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6243 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6244 @cindex symbol defaults
6245 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6246 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6247 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6248 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6249 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6250 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6251 existed, its value is preserved:
6252
6253 @smallexample
6254 @group
6255 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6256 .text : @{
6257 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6258 @dots{}
6259 @}
6260 @dots{}
6261 @}
6262 @end group
6263 @end smallexample
6264
6265 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6266 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6267 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6268
6269 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6270 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6271 @cindex section load address in expression
6272 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6273 Section LMA}).
6274
6275 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6276 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6277 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6278 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6279
6280 @kindex MAX
6281 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6282 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6283
6284 @kindex MIN
6285 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6286 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6287
6288 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6289 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6290 @cindex unallocated address, next
6291 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6292 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6293 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6294 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6295
6296 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6297 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6298 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6299
6300 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6301 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6302 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6303 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6304 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6305 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6306 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6307 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6308 name.
6309
6310 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6311 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6312 @cindex section size
6313 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6314 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6315 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6316 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6317 @smallexample
6318 @group
6319 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6320 .output @{
6321 .start = . ;
6322 @dots{}
6323 .end = . ;
6324 @}
6325 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6326 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6327 @dots{} @}
6328 @end group
6329 @end smallexample
6330
6331 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6332 @itemx sizeof_headers
6333 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6334 @cindex header size
6335 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6336 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6337 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6338 choose, to facilitate paging.
6339
6340 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6341 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6342 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6343 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6344 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6345 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6346 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6347 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6348 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6349 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6350 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6351 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6352 @end table
6353
6354 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6355 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6356 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6357 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6358 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6359 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6360 linker will report an error.
6361
6362 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6363
6364 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6365 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6366 commands.
6367
6368 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6369 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6370 read. This can affect archive searching.
6371
6372 @ifset GENERIC
6373 @node Machine Dependent
6374 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6375
6376 @cindex machine dependencies
6377 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6378 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6379 functionality are not listed.
6380
6381 @menu
6382 @ifset H8300
6383 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6384 @end ifset
6385 @ifset I960
6386 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6387 @end ifset
6388 @ifset M68HC11
6389 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6390 @end ifset
6391 @ifset ARM
6392 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6393 @end ifset
6394 @ifset HPPA
6395 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6396 @end ifset
6397 @ifset M68K
6398 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6399 @end ifset
6400 @ifset MIPS
6401 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6402 @end ifset
6403 @ifset MMIX
6404 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6405 @end ifset
6406 @ifset MSP430
6407 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6408 @end ifset
6409 @ifset NDS32
6410 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6411 @end ifset
6412 @ifset NIOSII
6413 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6414 @end ifset
6415 @ifset POWERPC
6416 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6417 @end ifset
6418 @ifset POWERPC64
6419 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6420 @end ifset
6421 @ifset SPU
6422 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6423 @end ifset
6424 @ifset TICOFF
6425 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6426 @end ifset
6427 @ifset WIN32
6428 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6429 @end ifset
6430 @ifset XTENSA
6431 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6432 @end ifset
6433 @end menu
6434 @end ifset
6435
6436 @ifset H8300
6437 @ifclear GENERIC
6438 @raisesections
6439 @end ifclear
6440
6441 @node H8/300
6442 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6443
6444 @cindex H8/300 support
6445 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6446 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6447
6448 @table @emph
6449 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6450 @item relaxing address modes
6451 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6452 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6453 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6454 respectively.
6455
6456 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6457 @item synthesizing instructions
6458 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6459 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6460 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6461 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6462 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6463 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6464 top page of memory).
6465
6466 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6467 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6468 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6469 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6470 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6471 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6472 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6473
6474 @item bit manipulation instructions
6475 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6476 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6477 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6478 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6479 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6480 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6481 the top page of memory).
6482
6483 @item system control instructions
6484 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6485 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6486 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6487 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6488 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6489 the top page of memory).
6490 @end table
6491
6492 @ifclear GENERIC
6493 @lowersections
6494 @end ifclear
6495 @end ifset
6496
6497 @ifclear GENERIC
6498 @ifset Renesas
6499 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6500 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6501 @node Renesas
6502 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6503
6504 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6505 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6506 options are required for these chips.
6507 @end ifset
6508 @end ifclear
6509
6510 @ifset I960
6511 @ifclear GENERIC
6512 @raisesections
6513 @end ifclear
6514
6515 @node i960
6516 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6517
6518 @cindex i960 support
6519
6520 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6521 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6522 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6523 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6524 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6525 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6526 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6527
6528 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6529 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6530 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6531 the names
6532
6533 @smallexample
6534 @group
6535 try
6536 libtry.a
6537 tryca
6538 libtryca.a
6539 @end group
6540 @end smallexample
6541
6542 @noindent
6543 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6544 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6545
6546 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6547 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6548 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6549 specifies a library.
6550
6551 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6552 @cindex relaxing on i960
6553 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6554 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6555 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6556 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6557 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6558 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6559 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6560 not itself call any subroutines).
6561
6562 @ifclear GENERIC
6563 @lowersections
6564 @end ifclear
6565 @end ifset
6566
6567 @ifset ARM
6568 @ifclear GENERIC
6569 @raisesections
6570 @end ifclear
6571
6572 @ifset M68HC11
6573 @ifclear GENERIC
6574 @raisesections
6575 @end ifclear
6576
6577 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6578 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6579
6580 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6581
6582 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6583
6584 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6585 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6586
6587 @table @emph
6588 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6589 @item relaxing address modes
6590 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6591 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6592 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6593 respectively.
6594
6595 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6596 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6597 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6598
6599 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6600 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6601 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6602 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6603 @code{bset} instructions.
6604
6605 @end table
6606
6607 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6608
6609 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6610 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6611 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6612 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6613 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6614 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6615 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6616 point to the function trampoline.
6617
6618 @ifclear GENERIC
6619 @lowersections
6620 @end ifclear
6621 @end ifset
6622
6623 @node ARM
6624 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6625
6626 @cindex ARM interworking support
6627 @kindex --support-old-code
6628 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6629 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6630 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6631 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6632 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6633 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6634 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6635 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6636 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6637 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6638
6639 @cindex thumb entry point
6640 @cindex entry point, thumb
6641 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6642 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6643 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6644 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6645 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6646 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6647
6648 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6649 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6650 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6651 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6652 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6653 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6654
6655 @cindex BE8
6656 @kindex --be8
6657 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6658 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6659 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6660 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6661 little-endian code.
6662
6663 @cindex TARGET1
6664 @kindex --target1-rel
6665 @kindex --target1-abs
6666 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6667 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6668 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6669 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6670
6671 @cindex TARGET2
6672 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6673 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6674 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6675 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6676 @table @samp
6677 @item rel
6678 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6679 @item abs
6680 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6681 @item got-rel
6682 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6683 @end table
6684
6685 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6686 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6687 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6688 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6689 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6690 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6691
6692 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6693 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6694 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6695
6696 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6697 relocations are ignored.
6698
6699 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6700 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6701 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6702 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6703
6704 @smallexample
6705 TST rM, #1
6706 MOVEQ PC, rM
6707 BX Rn
6708 @end smallexample
6709
6710 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6711 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6712 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6713
6714 @cindex USE_BLX
6715 @kindex --use-blx
6716 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6717 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6718 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6719 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6720 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6721
6722 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6723 specify it if you are using that target.
6724
6725 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6726 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6727 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6728 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6729 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6730 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6731 the support code can read the intended values.
6732
6733 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6734 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6735 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6736 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6737 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6738 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6739
6740 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6741 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6742 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6743 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6744 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6745 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6746
6747 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6748 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6749 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6750 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6751 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6752 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6753 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6754
6755 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6756 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6757 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6758 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6759 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6760 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6761 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6762
6763 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6764 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6765 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6766
6767 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6768 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6769
6770 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6771 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6772 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6773 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6774 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6775 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6776 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6777 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6778
6779 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6780 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6781
6782 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6783 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6784 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6785 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6786 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6787
6788 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6789 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6790 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6791 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6792 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6793 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6794
6795 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6796 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6797
6798 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6799 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6800 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6801 occurs.
6802
6803 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6804 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6805 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6806 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6807 occurs.
6808
6809 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6810 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6811 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6812 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6813 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6814 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6815 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6816 not be diagnosed.
6817
6818 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6819 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6820 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6821 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6822 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6823 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6824 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6825
6826 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6827 @kindex --pic-veneer
6828 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6829 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6830 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6831 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6832
6833 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6834 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6835 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6836 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6837 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6838 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6839 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6840 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6841 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6842 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6843 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6844 where they should be placed.
6845
6846 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6847 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6848 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6849 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6850 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6851 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6852 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6853 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6854 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6855 from the input sections.
6856
6857 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6858 @samp{N = +1}.
6859
6860 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6861 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6862 otherwise.
6863
6864 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6865 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6866 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6867 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6868
6869 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6870
6871 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6872 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6873 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6874 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6875
6876 Please contact ARM for further details.
6877
6878 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6879 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6880 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6881 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6882
6883 @kindex --long-plt
6884 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6885 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6886 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6887 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6888
6889 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
6890 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
6891 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
6892 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
6893
6894 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
6895 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
6896 Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
6897 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
6898 veneers in memory.
6899
6900 @kindex --cmse-implib
6901 @cindex Secure gateway import library
6902 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
6903 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
6904 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
6905 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
6906
6907 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
6908 @cindex Input import library
6909 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
6910 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
6911 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
6912 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
6913 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
6914 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
6915 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
6916 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
6917 specified.
6918
6919 @ifclear GENERIC
6920 @lowersections
6921 @end ifclear
6922 @end ifset
6923
6924 @ifset HPPA
6925 @ifclear GENERIC
6926 @raisesections
6927 @end ifclear
6928
6929 @node HPPA ELF32
6930 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6931 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6932 @kindex --multi-subspace
6933 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6934 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6935 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6936 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6937 multiple sub-spaces.
6938
6939 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6940 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6941 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6942 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6943 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6944 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6945 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6946 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6947 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6948 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6949 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6950 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6951 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6952 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6953 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6954 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6955
6956 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6957 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6958 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6959 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6960
6961 @ifclear GENERIC
6962 @lowersections
6963 @end ifclear
6964 @end ifset
6965
6966 @ifset M68K
6967 @ifclear GENERIC
6968 @raisesections
6969 @end ifclear
6970
6971 @node M68K
6972 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6973
6974 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6975 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6976 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6977 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6978 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6979 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6980 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6981 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6982 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6983 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6984 support such GOTs.
6985 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6986 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6987 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6988 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6989
6990 @ifclear GENERIC
6991 @lowersections
6992 @end ifclear
6993 @end ifset
6994
6995 @ifset MIPS
6996 @ifclear GENERIC
6997 @raisesections
6998 @end ifclear
6999
7000 @node MIPS
7001 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7002
7003 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7004 @kindex --insn32
7005 @kindex --no-insn32
7006 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7007 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7008 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7009 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7010 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7011 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7012
7013 @ifclear GENERIC
7014 @lowersections
7015 @end ifclear
7016 @end ifset
7017
7018 @ifset MMIX
7019 @ifclear GENERIC
7020 @raisesections
7021 @end ifclear
7022
7023 @node MMIX
7024 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7025 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7026 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7027 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7028 can translate between the two formats.
7029
7030 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7031 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7032 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7033 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7034 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7035 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7036 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7037 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7038
7039 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7040 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7041 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7042 of a section.
7043
7044 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7045 are left out from an mmo file.
7046
7047 @ifclear GENERIC
7048 @lowersections
7049 @end ifclear
7050 @end ifset
7051
7052 @ifset MSP430
7053 @ifclear GENERIC
7054 @raisesections
7055 @end ifclear
7056
7057 @node MSP430
7058 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7059 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7060 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7061 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7062
7063 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7064 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7065
7066 @table @code
7067 @item @samp{.vectors}
7068 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7069
7070 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7071 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7072 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7073
7074 @item @samp{.infomem}
7075 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7076 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7077
7078 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7079 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7080 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7081
7082 @item @samp{.noinit}
7083 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7084
7085 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7086 @end table
7087
7088 @ifclear GENERIC
7089 @lowersections
7090 @end ifclear
7091 @end ifset
7092
7093 @ifset NDS32
7094 @ifclear GENERIC
7095 @raisesections
7096 @end ifclear
7097
7098 @node NDS32
7099 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7100 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7101 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7102 relaxes objects according to these options.
7103
7104 @table @code
7105 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7106 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7107
7108 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7109 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7110
7111 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7112 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7113
7114 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7115 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7116
7117 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7118 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7119
7120 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7121 Update the existing EX9 table.
7122
7123 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7124 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7125
7126 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7127 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7128
7129 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7130 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7131
7132 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7133 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7134 @end table
7135
7136 @ifclear GENERIC
7137 @lowersections
7138 @end ifclear
7139 @end ifset
7140
7141 @ifset NIOSII
7142 @ifclear GENERIC
7143 @raisesections
7144 @end ifclear
7145
7146 @node Nios II
7147 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7148 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7149 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7150
7151 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7152 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7153 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7154 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7155 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7156 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7157 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7158 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7159 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7160 larger than 256MB.
7161
7162 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7163 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7164 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7165 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7166 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7167 register as a temporary.
7168
7169 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7170 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7171 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7172
7173 @ifclear GENERIC
7174 @lowersections
7175 @end ifclear
7176 @end ifset
7177
7178 @ifset POWERPC
7179 @ifclear GENERIC
7180 @raisesections
7181 @end ifclear
7182
7183 @node PowerPC ELF32
7184 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7185 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7186 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7187 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7188 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7189 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7190 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7191 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7192 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7193 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7194 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7195 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7196 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7197
7198 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7199 @table @option
7200 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7201 @kindex --bss-plt
7202 @item --bss-plt
7203 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7204 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7205 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7206 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7207 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7208 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7209 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7210 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7211
7212 @kindex --secure-plt
7213 @item --secure-plt
7214 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7215 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7216 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7217 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7218 style BSS PLT.
7219
7220 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7221 @kindex --sdata-got
7222 @item --sdata-got
7223 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7224 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7225 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7226 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7227 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7228 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7229 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7230 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7231 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7232 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7233 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7234 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7235
7236 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7237 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7238 @item --emit-stub-syms
7239 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7240 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7241
7242 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7243 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7244 @item --no-tls-optimize
7245 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7246 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7247 disable the optimization.
7248 @end table
7249
7250 @ifclear GENERIC
7251 @lowersections
7252 @end ifclear
7253 @end ifset
7254
7255 @ifset POWERPC64
7256 @ifclear GENERIC
7257 @raisesections
7258 @end ifclear
7259
7260 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7261 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7262
7263 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7264 @table @option
7265 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7266 @kindex --stub-group-size
7267 @item --stub-group-size
7268 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7269 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7270 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7271 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7272 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7273 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7274 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7275 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7276 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7277 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7278 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7279 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7280 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7281 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7282
7283 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7284 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7285 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7286 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7287
7288 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7289 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7290 @item --emit-stub-syms
7291 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7292 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7293
7294 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7295 @kindex --dotsyms
7296 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7297 @item --dotsyms
7298 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7299 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7300 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7301 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7302 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7303 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7304 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7305 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7306 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7307 feature.
7308
7309 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7310 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7311 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7312 @item --save-restore-funcs
7313 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7314 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7315 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7316 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7317 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7318 link.
7319
7320 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7321 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7322 @item --no-tls-optimize
7323 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7324 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7325 disable the optimization.
7326
7327 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7328 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7329 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7330 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7331 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7332 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7333 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7334 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7335 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7336 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7337 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7338 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7339 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7340 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7341 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7342
7343 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7344 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7345 @item --no-opd-optimize
7346 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7347 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7348 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7349 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7350
7351 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7352 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7353 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7354 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7355 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7356 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7357 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7358
7359 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7360 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7361 @item --no-toc-optimize
7362 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7363 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7364 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7365 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7366 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7367 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7368 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7369 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7370 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7371 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7372 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7373 optimization.
7374
7375 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7376 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7377 @item --no-multi-toc
7378 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7379 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7380 where TOC
7381 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7382 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7383 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7384 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7385 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7386 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7387 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7388 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7389
7390 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7391 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7392 @item --no-toc-sort
7393 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7394 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7395 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7396 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7397 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7398 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7399 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7400 off this feature.
7401
7402 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7403 @kindex --plt-align
7404 @kindex --no-plt-align
7405 @item --plt-align
7406 @itemx --no-plt-align
7407 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7408 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7409 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7410 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7411 stubs are packed tightly.
7412
7413 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7414 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7415 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7416 @item --plt-static-chain
7417 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7418 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7419 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7420 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7421
7422 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7423 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7424 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7425 @item --plt-thread-safe
7426 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7427 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7428 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7429 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7430 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7431 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7432 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7433 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7434 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7435 default behaviour.
7436 @end table
7437
7438 @ifclear GENERIC
7439 @lowersections
7440 @end ifclear
7441 @end ifset
7442
7443 @ifset SPU
7444 @ifclear GENERIC
7445 @raisesections
7446 @end ifclear
7447
7448 @node SPU ELF
7449 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7450
7451 @cindex SPU ELF options
7452 @table @option
7453
7454 @cindex SPU plugins
7455 @kindex --plugin
7456 @item --plugin
7457 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7458
7459 @cindex SPU overlays
7460 @kindex --no-overlays
7461 @item --no-overlays
7462 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7463 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7464 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7465 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7466
7467 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7468 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7469 @item --emit-stub-syms
7470 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7471 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7472
7473 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7474 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7475 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7476 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7477 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7478 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7479
7480 @cindex SPU local store size
7481 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7482 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7483 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7484 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7485 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7486
7487 @cindex SPU
7488 @kindex --stack-analysis
7489 @item --stack-analysis
7490 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7491 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7492 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7493 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7494 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7495 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7496 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7497 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7498 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7499 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7500 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7501 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7502 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7503 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7504 and calls will be given.
7505
7506 @cindex SPU
7507 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7508 @item --emit-stack-syms
7509 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7510 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7511 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7512 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7513 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7514 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7515 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7516 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7517 @end table
7518
7519 @ifclear GENERIC
7520 @lowersections
7521 @end ifclear
7522 @end ifset
7523
7524 @ifset TICOFF
7525 @ifclear GENERIC
7526 @raisesections
7527 @end ifclear
7528
7529 @node TI COFF
7530 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7531 @cindex TI COFF versions
7532 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7533 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7534 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7535 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7536 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7537 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7538
7539 @ifclear GENERIC
7540 @lowersections
7541 @end ifclear
7542 @end ifset
7543
7544 @ifset WIN32
7545 @ifclear GENERIC
7546 @raisesections
7547 @end ifclear
7548
7549 @node WIN32
7550 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7551
7552 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7553 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7554 command line options mentioned here.
7555
7556 @table @emph
7557 @cindex import libraries
7558 @item import libraries
7559 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7560 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7561 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7562 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7563 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7564 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7565
7566 @item exporting DLL symbols
7567 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7568 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7569
7570 @table @emph
7571 @item using auto-export functionality
7572 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7573 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7574 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7575
7576 @itemize
7577 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7578 @item --exclude-symbols
7579 @item --exclude-libs
7580 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7581 @item --version-script
7582 @end itemize
7583
7584 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7585 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7586 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7587 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7588 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7589 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7590 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7591 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7592
7593 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7594 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7595 if either of the following are true:
7596
7597 @itemize
7598 @item A DEF file is used.
7599 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7600 @end itemize
7601
7602 @item using a DEF file
7603 @cindex using a DEF file
7604 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7605 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7606 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7607 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7608 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7609
7610 @example
7611 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7612 @end example
7613
7614 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7615 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7616
7617 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7618
7619 @example
7620 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7621
7622 EXPORTS
7623 foo
7624 bar
7625 _bar = bar
7626 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7627 var1 DATA
7628 doo = foo == foo2
7629 eoo DATA == var1
7630 @end example
7631
7632 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7633 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7634 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7635 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7636 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7637 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7638 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7639 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7640 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7641
7642 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7643 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7644 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7645
7646 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7647 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7648 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7649 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7650
7651 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7652 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7653 non-default base address for the image.
7654
7655 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7656 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7657 filename specified on the command line.
7658
7659 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7660
7661 @example
7662 EXPORTS
7663 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7664 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7665 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7666 @end example
7667
7668 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7669 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7670 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7671 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7672 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7673 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7674 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7675
7676 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7677
7678 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7679 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7680 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7681 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7682 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7683
7684 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7685 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7686 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7687 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7688
7689 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7690 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7691 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7692 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7693 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7694 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7695 application will behave unexpectedly.
7696
7697 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7698 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7699 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7700 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7701 the DLL without an import library.
7702
7703 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7704 other DEF file statements
7705
7706 @cindex creating a DEF file
7707 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7708 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7709
7710 @item Using decorations
7711 @cindex Using decorations
7712 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7713 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7714 declared as:
7715
7716 @example
7717 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7718 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7719 @end example
7720
7721 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7722 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7723 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7724 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7725
7726 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7727 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7728 instead:
7729
7730 @example
7731 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7732 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7733 @end example
7734
7735 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7736 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7737 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7738 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7739 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7740 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7741 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7742 information.
7743 @end table
7744
7745 @cindex automatic data imports
7746 @item automatic data imports
7747 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7748 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7749 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7750 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7751 code to these platforms, especially for large
7752 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7753 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7754 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7755 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7756 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7757 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7758 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7759 trigger the feature's use.
7760
7761 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7762 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7763
7764 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7765 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7766
7767 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7768 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7769 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7770 below.
7771
7772 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7773 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7774 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7775 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7776 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7777 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7778 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7779 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7780 references.
7781
7782 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7783 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7784 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7785 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7786 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7787 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7788 run without error on an older system.
7789
7790 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7791 enabled as needed.
7792
7793 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7794 @item direct linking to a dll
7795 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7796 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7797 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7798 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7799 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7800 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7801 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7802 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7803 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7804 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7805
7806 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7807 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7808 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7809 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7810 select the dll instead of an import library.
7811
7812
7813 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7814 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7815
7816 @example
7817 libxxx.dll.a
7818 xxx.dll.a
7819 libxxx.a
7820 xxx.lib
7821 cygxxx.dll (*)
7822 libxxx.dll
7823 xxx.dll
7824 @end example
7825
7826 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7827
7828 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7829 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7830 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7831 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7832 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7833
7834 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7835 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7836 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7837 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7838 could coexist on the same machine.
7839
7840 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7841 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7842 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7843
7844 @example
7845 bin/
7846 cygxxx.dll
7847 lib/
7848 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7849 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7850 @end example
7851
7852 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7853 done two ways:
7854
7855 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7856 @example
7857 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7858 @end example
7859
7860 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7861 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7862 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7863 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7864
7865 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7866 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7867 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7868 making the app/dll.
7869
7870 @example
7871 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7872 @end example
7873
7874 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7875
7876 @example
7877 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7878 @end example
7879
7880 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7881 perfectly legal
7882
7883 @example
7884 bin/
7885 cygxxx-5.dll
7886 lib/
7887 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7888 @end example
7889
7890 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7891 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7892 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7893
7894 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7895 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7896
7897 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7898 work with auto-imported data.
7899
7900 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7901 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7902 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7903 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7904 possible to do this without an import lib.
7905
7906 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7907 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7908 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7909 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7910
7911 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7912 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7913 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7914 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7915 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7916 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7917 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7918
7919 @item symbol aliasing
7920 @table @emph
7921 @item adding additional names
7922 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7923 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7924 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7925 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7926 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7927
7928 @example
7929 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7930
7931 EXPORTS
7932 foo
7933 _foo = foo
7934 @end example
7935
7936 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7937
7938 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7939 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7940
7941 @example
7942 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7943 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7944 @end example
7945
7946 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7947 symbols.
7948
7949 @item renaming symbols
7950 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7951 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7952 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7953 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7954 created). In the following example:
7955
7956 @example
7957 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7958
7959 EXPORTS
7960 _foo = foo
7961 @end example
7962
7963 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7964 @samp{_foo}.
7965 @end table
7966
7967 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7968 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7969 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7970 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7971 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7972 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7973 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7974 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7975 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7976 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7977 which is probably not what you wanted.
7978
7979 @cindex weak externals
7980 @item weak externals
7981 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7982 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7983 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7984 are three variants of weak externals:
7985 @itemize
7986 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7987 called lazy externals.
7988 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7989 This form is not presently implemented.
7990 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7991 implemented.
7992 @end itemize
7993 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7994 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7995 uses a default value.
7996
7997 @cindex aligned common symbols
7998 @item aligned common symbols
7999 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8000 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8001 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8002 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8003 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8004 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8005 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8006 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8007
8008 @end table
8009
8010 @ifclear GENERIC
8011 @lowersections
8012 @end ifclear
8013 @end ifset
8014
8015 @ifset XTENSA
8016 @ifclear GENERIC
8017 @raisesections
8018 @end ifclear
8019
8020 @node Xtensa
8021 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8022
8023 @cindex Xtensa processors
8024 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8025 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8026 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8027 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8028 example, with the command:
8029
8030 @smallexample
8031 SECTIONS
8032 @{
8033 .text : @{
8034 *(.literal .text)
8035 @}
8036 @}
8037 @end smallexample
8038
8039 @noindent
8040 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8041 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8042 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8043 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8044 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8045 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8046 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8047
8048 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8049 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8050 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8051 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8052 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8053 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8054 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8055 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8056 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8057 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8058 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8059 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8060
8061 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8062 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8063 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8064 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8065 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8066 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8067 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8068 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8069 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8070 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8071 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8072 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8073 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8074 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8075
8076 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8077 control the linker:
8078
8079 @cindex Xtensa options
8080 @table @option
8081 @item --size-opt
8082 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8083 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8084 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8085 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8086 preserve the correctness of the code.
8087 @end table
8088
8089 @ifclear GENERIC
8090 @lowersections
8091 @end ifclear
8092 @end ifset
8093
8094 @ifclear SingleFormat
8095 @node BFD
8096 @chapter BFD
8097
8098 @cindex back end
8099 @cindex object file management
8100 @cindex object formats available
8101 @kindex objdump -i
8102 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8103 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8104 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8105 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8106 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8107 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8108 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8109 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8110 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8111
8112 @cindex BFD requirements
8113 @cindex requirements for BFD
8114 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8115 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8116 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8117 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8118 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8119 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8120 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8121
8122 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8123 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8124 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8125 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8126
8127 @menu
8128 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8129 @end menu
8130
8131 @node BFD outline
8132 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8133 @cindex opening object files
8134 @include bfdsumm.texi
8135 @end ifclear
8136
8137 @node Reporting Bugs
8138 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8139 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8140 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8141
8142 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8143
8144 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8145 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8146 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8147 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8148 @command{ld}.
8149
8150 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8151 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8152
8153 @menu
8154 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8155 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8156 @end menu
8157
8158 @node Bug Criteria
8159 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8160 @cindex bug criteria
8161
8162 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8163
8164 @itemize @bullet
8165 @cindex fatal signal
8166 @cindex linker crash
8167 @cindex crash of linker
8168 @item
8169 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8170 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8171
8172 @cindex error on valid input
8173 @item
8174 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8175
8176 @cindex invalid input
8177 @item
8178 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8179 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8180 object files are correct.
8181
8182 @item
8183 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8184 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8185 @end itemize
8186
8187 @node Bug Reporting
8188 @section How to Report Bugs
8189 @cindex bug reports
8190 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8191
8192 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8193 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8194 recommend you contact that organization first.
8195
8196 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8197 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8198 distribution.
8199
8200 @ifset BUGURL
8201 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8202 @value{BUGURL}.
8203 @end ifset
8204
8205 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8206 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8207 fact or leave it out, state it!
8208
8209 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8210 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8211 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8212 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8213 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8214 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8215 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8216 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8217 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8218 and the most helpful.
8219
8220 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8221 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8222 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8223
8224 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8225 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8226 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8227 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8228
8229 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8230
8231 @itemize @bullet
8232 @item
8233 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8234 the @samp{--version} argument.
8235
8236 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8237 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8238
8239 @item
8240 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8241 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8242
8243 @item
8244 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8245 version number.
8246
8247 @item
8248 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8249 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8250
8251 @item
8252 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8253 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8254 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8255 sufficient.
8256
8257 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8258 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8259
8260 @item
8261 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8262 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8263 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8264 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8265 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8266 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8267 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8268 attachments are best.
8269
8270 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8271 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8272 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8273 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8274 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8275
8276 @item
8277 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8278 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8279
8280 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8281 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8282 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8283 a chance to make a mistake.
8284
8285 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8286 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8287 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8288 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8289 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8290 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8291 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8292 any conclusion from our observations.
8293
8294 @item
8295 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8296 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8297 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8298 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8299 context, not by line number.
8300
8301 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8302 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8303 @end itemize
8304
8305 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8306
8307 @itemize @bullet
8308 @item
8309 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8310
8311 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8312 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8313 changes will not affect it.
8314
8315 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8316 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8317 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8318 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8319
8320 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8321 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8322 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8323 less time, and so on.
8324
8325 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8326 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8327
8328 @item
8329 A patch for the bug.
8330
8331 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8332 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8333 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8334 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8335
8336 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8337 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8338 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8339 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8340 fixed.
8341
8342 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8343 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8344 help us to understand.
8345
8346 @item
8347 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8348
8349 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8350 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8351 @end itemize
8352
8353 @node MRI
8354 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8355 @cindex MRI compatibility
8356 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8357 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8358 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8359 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8360 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8361 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8362 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8363
8364 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8365 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8366 features to make use of them.
8367
8368 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8369 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8370
8371 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8372 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8373 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8374 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8375 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8376
8377 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8378
8379 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8380 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8381 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8382
8383 @table @code
8384 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8385 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8386 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8387 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8388 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8389 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8390 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8391 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8392 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8393 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8394 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8395
8396 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8397 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8398 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8399 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8400
8401 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8402
8403 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8404 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8405 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8406 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8407
8408 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8409 @item BASE @var{expression}
8410 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8411 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8412
8413 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8414 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8415 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8416 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8417
8418 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8419 @item END
8420 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8421
8422 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8423 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8424 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8425 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8426
8427 @enumerate
8428 @item
8429 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8430
8431 @item
8432 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8433
8434 @item
8435 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8436 @samp{COFF}
8437 @end enumerate
8438
8439 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8440 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8441 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8442 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8443
8444 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8445 same line, with no change in its effect.
8446
8447 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8448 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8449 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8450 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8451 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8452 command line.
8453
8454 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8455 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8456 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8457 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8458 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8459
8460 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8461 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8462 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8463 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8464 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8465 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8466 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8467 file, in the order specified.
8468
8469 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8470 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8471 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8472 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8473 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8474 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8475
8476 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8477 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8478 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8479 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8480 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8481 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8482 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8483 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8484 @end table
8485
8486 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8487 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8488 @include fdl.texi
8489
8490 @node LD Index
8491 @unnumbered LD Index
8492
8493 @printindex cp
8494
8495 @tex
8496 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8497 % meantime:
8498 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8499 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8500 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8501 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8502 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8503 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8504 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8505 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8506 \page\colophon
8507 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8508 @end tex
8509
8510 @bye
This page took 0.220504 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.